Ford 1996 Crown Victoria Owners Manual

Ford-1996-Crown-Victoria-Owners-Manual-762168 ford-1996-crown-victoria-owners-manual-762168

Manual 96croog1e 1996 Ford Crown Victoria Owner's Manual | Manual Device

2015-10-23

: Ford Ford-1996-Ford-Crown-Victoria-Owners-Manual-815194 ford-1996-ford-crown-victoria-owners-manual-815194 ford pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF PDF.
Page Count: 342 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

[PI00025( V)05/95]
thirty-six pica chart:
File:rcpiv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:58 1996
*[PI00400( ALL)05/95]
thirty-six pica chart:
File:rcpiv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:58 1996
*[PI00425( ALL)05/95]
Table of Contents
Introductory Information ............................... 1
Safety Restraints .............................................. 7
Starting Your Crown Victoria .................... 37
Warning Lights and Gauges ....................... 47
Instrument Panel Controls .......................... 87
Steering Column Controls ........................ 109
Features .......................................................... 121
Electronic Sound Systems ......................... 149
Driving Your Crown Victoria .................. 173
Roadside Emergencies ................................ 197
Customer Assistance ................................... 215
Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 223
Accessories .................................................... 227
Servicing Your Crown Victoria ............... 233
Quick Index .................................................. 303
Index ............................................................... 313
Service Station Information ...................... 332
File:rcpiv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:58 1996
1
Introductory Information
*[IN00300( ALL)04/95] Ford’s Commitment to You
*[IN00500( ALL)04/95] Our Guiding Principles
*[IN00600( ALL)04/95] ❑Quality comes first. For your satisfaction, the
quality of our products and services must be
our number one priority.
*[IN00700( ALL)04/95] ❑You are the focus of everything we do. Our
work must be done with you in mind,
providing better products and services than
our competition.
*[IN00750( ALL)04/95] ❑Continuous improvement is essential to our
success. We must strive for excellence in
everything we do: in our products — in their
safety and value — and in our services, our
human relations, our competitiveness, and
our profitability.
*[IN00800( ALL)04/95] ❑Employee involvement is our way of life.
We are a team. We must treat one another
with trust and respect.
*[IN00900( ALL)04/95] ❑Dealers and suppliers are our partners. We
must maintain mutually beneficial
relationships with dealers, suppliers, and our
other business associates.
*[IN01000( ALL)04/95] ❑Integrity is never compromised. Our conduct
worldwide must be pursued in a manner that
is socially responsible and commands respect
for its integrity and for its positive
contributions to society.
File:rcinv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:14:27 1996
2
*[IN01100( ALL)04/95] Things to Know About Using
This Guide
*[IN01200( ALL)04/95] Congratulations on the purchase of your new
vehicle. This guide has information about the
equipment and the options for your new vehicle.
You may not have bought all of the options
available to you. If you do not know which
information applies to your vehicle, talk to your
dealer.
*[IN01300( ALL)04/95] This guide describes equipment and gives
specifications for equipment that was in effect
when this guide was approved for printing. Ford
may discontinue models or change specifications
or design without any notice and without
incurring obligation.
*[IN01400( ALL)05/95] NOTES and WARNINGS
*[IN01420( ALL)05/95] NOTES give you additional information about
the subject matter you are referencing.
*[IN01440( ALL)05/95] WARNINGS remind you to be especially careful
in those areas where carelessness can cause
damage to your vehicle or personal injury to
yourself, your passengers or other people. Please
read all WARNINGS carefully.
*[IN01460( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
*[IN01500( ALL)04/95] Finding Information in This Guide
*[IN01600( ALL)04/95] After you have read this guide once, you will
probably return to it when you have a specific
question or need additional information. To help
you find specific information quickly, you can
use the Quick Index or the Index.
File:rcinv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:14:27 1996
3
*[IN01700( ALL)05/95] The Quick Index at the end of the book
provides a page number following each item
which indicates where detailed information can
be found.
*[IN01900( ALL)04/95] To use the Index, turn to the back of the book
and search in the alphabetical listing for the
word that best describes the information you
need. If the word you chose is not listed, think
of other related words and look them up. We
have designed the Index so that you can find
information under a technical term.
%*[IN02000( ALL)04/95] Canadian Owners — French Version
*[IN02100( ALL)04/95] French Owner Guides can be obtained from your
dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of
Canada, Limited, Service Publications, P.O. Box
1580, Station B, Mississauga, Ontario L4Y 4G3.
*[IN02400( ALL)04/95] Your Maintenance Schedule and
Record Booklet
*[IN02500( ALL)03/95] The Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet lists
the services that are most important for keeping
your vehicle in good condition. A record log is
also provided to help you keep track of all
services performed.
%*[IN02600( ALL)01/95] About the Warranties
[IN02700( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is covered by three types of
warranties: Basic Vehicle Warranty, Extended
Warranties on certain parts, and Emissions
Warranties.
%*[IN03100( ALL)03/95] Read your Warranty Information Booklet carefully
to find out about your vehicle’s warranties and
your basic rights and responsibilities.
*[IN03250( ALL)03/95] If you lose your Warranty Information Booklet, you
can get a new one free of charge. Contact any
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer, or refer to the
File:rcinv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:14:27 1996
4
addresses and phone numbers on the first page
of this owner guide.
%*[IN04000( ALL)01/95] Buying a Ford Extended Service Plan
*[IN04100( ALL)01/94] If you bought your vehicle in the U.S., you can
buy a Ford Extended Service Plan for your
vehicle. This optional contract provides service
protection for a longer period of time than the
basic warranty that comes with your vehicle.
*[IN04200( ALL)01/95] You do not have to buy this option when you
buy your vehicle. However, your option to
purchase the Ford Extended Service Plan runs
out after 18 months or 18,000 miles. See your
dealer for more details about the Ford Extended
Service Plan.
*[IN04250( ALL)01/95] If you purchased a Canadian vehicle and did not
take advantage of the Ford Extended Service
Plan at the time of purchase, you may still be
eligible. See your dealer for the details.
%*[IN06000( ALL)01/95] Breaking Your Vehicle In
*[IN06100( ALL)03/95] Your new vehicle goes through an adjustment or
break-in period during the first 1,000 miles
(1,600 km) that you drive it. During the break-in
period, you need to pay careful attention to how
you drive your vehicle.
%*[IN06300( ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid sudden stops. Because your vehicle
has new brake linings, you should take these
steps:
*[IN06400( ALL)01/95] —Watch traffic carefully so that you can
anticipate when to stop.
*[IN06500( ALL)01/95] —Begin braking well in advance.
*[IN06600( ALL)01/95] —Apply the brakes gradually.
*[IN06700( ALL)01/95] The break-in period for new brake linings
lasts for 100 miles (160 km) of city driving or
1,000 miles (1,600 km) of highway driving.
File:rcinv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:14:27 1996
5
%*[IN06800( ALL)01/95] ❑Use only the type of engine oil that Ford
recommends. See Engine oil recommendations
in the Index. Do not use special “break-in”
oils.
*[IN07000( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with an Electronic
Powertrain Control Module that limits engine
and/or vehicle speeds with a cut-out mode to
promote durability.
%*[IN07100( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Outside of Your
Vehicle
*[IN07130( ALL)05/95] Pollen, bird droppings and tree sap can damage
the paint, especially in hot weather. Wash your
vehicle as often as necessary to keep it clean.
*[IN07160( ALL)05/95] Take similar precautions if your vehicle is
exposed to chemical industrial fallout.
*[IN07190( ALL )05/95] Paint damage resulting from fallout is not
related to a defect in paint materials or
workmanship and therefore is not covered by
warranty. Ford, however, believes that continual
improvement in customer satisfaction is a high
priority. For this reason, Ford has authorized
their dealers to repair, at no charge to the
owner, the surfaces of new vehicles damaged by
environmental fallout within 12 months or 12,000
miles (20,000 km) of purchase, whichever comes
first. Customers may be required to bring their
vehicle in for inspection by a Ford
representative.
File:rcinv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:14:27 1996
6
%*[IN07200( ALL)04/95] Washing and Polishing Your Vehicle
*[IN07300( ALL)04/95] Wash the outside of your vehicle, including the
underside, with a mild detergent.
*[IN07400( ALL)04/95] DO NOT:
*[IN07500( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle with hot water
*[IN07600( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while it sits in direct
sunlight
*[IN07700( ALL)04/95] ❑Wash your vehicle while the body is hot
*[IN08100( ALL)04/95] Polish your vehicle to remove harmful deposits
and protect the finish.
%*[IN08200( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Chrome and Aluminum Parts
*[IN08300( ALL)04/95] Wash chrome and aluminum parts with a mild
detergent. Do not use steel wool, abrasive
cleaners, fuel, or strong detergents.
%*[IN08400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning Plastic Parts
*[IN08500( ALL)04/95] Some of your vehicle’s exterior trim parts are
plastic. Clean with a tar and road oil remover if
necessary. Use a vinyl cleaner for routine
cleaning.
*[IN08600( ALL)04/95] Do not clean plastic parts with thinners, solvents
or petroleum-based cleaners.
%*[IN08700( ALL)04/95] If you have your vehicle rustproofed, remove
oversprayed rustproofing with a tar and road oil
remover. If rustproofing is not removed from
plastic and rubber parts, it can cause
deterioration.
File:rcinv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:14:27 1996
7
Safety Restraints
%*[SR00500( ALL)04/95] Important Safety Belt Information
*[SR00600( ALL)03/95] The use of safety belts helps to restrain you and
your passengers in case of a collision. In most
states and in Canada the law requires their use.
*[SR00800( ALL)01/95] Safety belts provide best restraint when:
*[SR00900( ALL)01/95] ❑the seatback is upright
*[SR01000( ALL)01/95] ❑the occupant is sitting upright (not slouched)
*[SR01100( ALL)01/95] ❑the lap belt is snug and low on the hips
*[SR01200( ALL)01/95] ❑the shoulder belt is snug against the chest
*[SR01300( ALL)01/95] ❑the knees are straight forward
*[SR02100( ALL)05/95] To help you remember to fasten your safety belt,
a warning light may come on and a chime may
sound. See Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime in
the Warning Lights and Gauges chapter.
*[SR02500( ALL)01/95] See the following sections in this chapter for
directions on how to properly use these safety
belts. Also see Safety Restraints for Children in this
chapter for special instructions about using
safety belts for children.
%*[SR02600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Make sure that you and your passengers
wear safety belts. Always drive and ride
with your seatback upright and the lap
belt snug and low across the hips.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
8
*[SR02700( ALL)03/95] RWARNING
Never wear the shoulder belt under the
arm. Never swing it around the neck over
the inside shoulder. Never use a single
belt for more than one person or across
more than one seating position. Each
seating position in your vehicle has a
specific safety belt assembly which is
made up of one buckle and one tongue
that are designed to be used as a pair.
Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision.
*[SR02801( ALL)01/95] RWARNING
Never drive or ride with a twisted or
jammed safety belt. If you cannot untwist
or unjam the safety belt, see the nearest
qualified technician immediately.
*[SR02901( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.
*[SR03001( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.
*[SR03200( ALL)05/95] Lock the doors of your vehicle before driving to
lessen the risk of the door coming open in a
collision.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
9
[SR03700( ALL)05/95] Combination Lap and Shoulder
Belts
*[SR03800( ALL)01/95] While your vehicle is in motion, the combination
lap and shoulder belt adjusts to your movement.
However, if you brake hard, corner hard or if
your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph
(8 km/h) or more, the lap and shoulder belt
locks and helps reduce your forward movement.
*[SR04100( ALL)05/95] After you get into your vehicle, close the door
and lock it. Then adjust the seat to the position
that suits you best.
[SR04400( ALL)06/93] To fasten the belt, pull the lap/shoulder belt
from the retractor so that the shoulder portion of
the belt crosses your shoulder and chest. Be sure
the belt is not twisted. If it is, remove the twist.
Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle
until you hear a snap and feel it latch. Make
sure the tongue is securely fastened in the
buckle.
*[SR04550( BCGV)01/95]
quarter page art:0010018-B
Fastening the front seat combination lap and shoulder belt
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
10
[SR04600( BCGV)03/95]
one third page art:0010502-A
Fastening the rear seat combination lap and shoulder belt
*[SR04675( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand
Important Safety Belt Information at
the beginning of this chapter.
% [SR04676( GV)03/95] Safety Belts for All Passenger Outboard
Seating Positions
[SR04679( GV)03/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a dual locking
mode retractor on the shoulder belt portion of
the combination lap/shoulder safety belt for the
front and rear outboard passenger seats.
*[SR04682( ALL)05/95] Dual locking mode retractors operate in two
ways:
*[SR04683( ALL)03/95]
Vehicle sensitive (emergency) locking mode
[SR04684( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
retractor will allow the occupant freedom of
movement, locking tight only on hard braking,
hard cornering or impacts of approximately
5 mph (8 km/h) or more. The retractor can also
be made to lock by pulling/jerking on the belt.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
11
%*[SR04685( ALL)04/95]
Automatic locking mode
[SR04686( ALL)03/95] In this operating mode, the shoulder belt
retractor will be automatically locked and remain
locked when the combination lap/shoulder
safety belt is buckled, and does not allow the
occupant freedom of movement. This mode
provides the following:
[SR04687( ALL)03/95] ❑A tight lap/shoulder belt fit on the occupant.
[SR04688( ALL)03/95] ❑Child seat or infant carrier installation
restraint.
*[SR04689( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never install a rear-facing child seat or
infant carrier in the right front passenger
seat.
*[SR04690( ALL)03/95] This mode must be used when installing a child
safety seat on the front passenger seat and rear
outboard seats where dual locking retractors are
provided.
*[SR04691( ALL)04/95] To switch the retractor from the emergency
locking mode to the automatic locking mode,
perform the following steps:
*[SR04692( ALL)03/95] 1. Buckle the lap/shoulder combination belt.
*[SR04693( ALL)03/95] 2. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and
pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted, and when allowed to retract, a
clicking sound will be heard. At this time,
the belt retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child restraint mode).
*[SR04694( ALL)05/95] 3. A clicking sound will contnue to be heard as
the belt is allowed to retract.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
12
[SR04695( ALL)03/95] NOTE: When the combination lap/shoulder
belt is unbuckled and allowed to
retract completely, the retractor will
switch back to the vehicle sensitive
(emergency) locking mode. See the
detailed instructions under Safety Seats
for Children in this chapter.
%*[SR04795( GV)05/95] Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment
*[SR04800( GV)04/95]
Driver and right front passenger
*[SR04900( GV)01/95] You can adjust the shoulder belt height to one of
five (5) positions. To adjust, pinch the release
button (see Figures 1 and 2) and slide it up or
down until the belt rests across the middle of
your shoulder. Release the button and make sure
the adjuster is firmly in one of the five (5)
positions.
*[SR04940( GV)02/95] RWARNING
If the shoulder belt is off your shoulder
or on your upper arm, there is a greater
risk of severe injury in a collision.
[SR04950( GV)12/94] BE SURE THE BELT IS PROPERLY
POSITIONED ON YOUR SHOULDER EACH
TIME YOU USE THE BELT.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
13
[SR05200( GV)06/93]
half page art:0010701-A
The shoulder belt height adjuster
[SR05300( GV)11/92]
one third page art:0010702-A
The shoulder belt height adjuster
*[SR05400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The lap belts should fit snugly and as low
as possible around the hips, not around
the waist.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
14
*[SR05500( BCGV)03/95] RWARNING
All front and rear seat outboard
occupants (including pregnant women)
should wear lap and shoulder belts, for
optimum protection in a collision.
*[SR05600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Failure to follow these precautions could
increase the risk and/or severity of injury
in a collision. 1) Use the shoulder belt on
the outside shoulder only. Never wear the
shoulder belt under the arm. 2) Never
swing it around your neck over the inside
shoulder. 3) Never use a single belt for
more than one person.
[SR05800( ALL)05/95] To unfasten all the belts:
[SR06000( GV)06/93] 1. Push the release button in the center of the
buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch
from the buckle.
[SR06300( GV)06/93]
quarter page art:0011166-A
Unfastening the outboard lap/shoulder belts
*[SR06600( ALL)03/95] 2. While the belt retracts, guide the tongue to
its stowed position. If you do not guide the
tongue, it may strike you or part of the
vehicle.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
15
[SR09400] Lap Belts — Center Seating
Position
*[SR09500( GV)05/95] The lap belts in the center of the front and rear
seats do not adjust automatically. You must
adjust them to fit snugly and as low as possible
around your hips. Do not wear them around
your waist.
*[SR09701( BCGV)05/95] Pull the belt across your hips and insert the
tongue into the correct buckle on your seat
until you hear a snap and feel it lock. Make sure
the buckle is securely fastened.
%*[SR09801( BCGV)05/95] If you need to lengthen the belt, unfasten it and
tip the belt tongue at a right angle to the belt.
Pull the belt tongue over your lap until it
reaches the buckle.
*[SR09901( BCGV)05/95] If you need to shorten the belt, pull on the loose
end of the webbing until the belt fits snugly.
*[SR10300( BCGV)05/95] To unfasten the belt, push the release button on
the buckle. This allows the tongue to unlatch
from the buckle.
[SR10500( GV)11/92] Because the center lap belts do not have
retractors, they should be shortened and fastened
when not in use.
[SR10600( GV)11/92]
quarter page art:0010022-A
Unfastening center lap safety belts
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
16
%*[SR17500( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Extension Assembly
*[SR17600( ALL)05/95] For some people, the safety belt may be too
short even when it is fully extended. You can
add about eight inches (20 cm) to the belt length
with a safety belt extension assembly (part
number 611C22). Safety belt extensions are
available at no cost from your dealer.
*[SR17700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Failure to follow these instructions will
affect the performance of the safety belts
and increase the risk of personal injury.
*[SR17705( ALL)05/95] Use only extensions manufactured by the same
supplier as the safety belt. Manufacturer
identification is located at the end of the
webbing on the label. Also, use the safety belt
extension only if the safety belt is too short for
you when fully extended. Do not use extension
to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the
torso.
[SR17710( ALL)05/95] Safety Belt Maintenance
*[SR17720(ALL )05/95] Check the safety belt systems periodically to
make sure that they work properly and are not
damaged.
%*[SR17730( ALL)05/95] All safety belt assemblies, including retractors,
buckles, front seat belt buckle support assemblies
(slide bar) (if equipped), child safety seat tether
bracket assemblies (if equipped), and attaching
hardware, should be inspected after any
collision. Ford recommends that all safety belt
assemblies used in vehicles involved in a
collision be replaced. However, if the collision
was minor and a qualified technician finds that
the belts do not show damage and continue to
operate properly, they do not need to be
replaced. Safety belt assemblies not in use
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
17
during a collision should also be inspected and
replaced if either damage or improper operation
is noted.
%*[SR17740( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Safety Belts
*[SR17780( ALL)05/95] Clean the safety belts with any mild soap
solution that is recommended for cleaning
upholstery or carpets. Do not bleach or dye the
belt webbing because this may weaken it.
*[SR17800( ALL)04/95] Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System (SRS)
*[SR18200( ALL)04/95] The driver and right front passenger air bags are
Supplemental Restraint Systems (SRS), provided
at these seating positions in addition to the
lap/shoulder belt, and are designed to
supplement the protection provided to properly
belted occupants in moderate to severe frontal
collisions. The supplemental air bag system does
not provide restraint to the lower body.
*[SR18400( ALL)02/95] The Importance of Wearing Safety Belts
*[SR18425( ALL)11/93] RWARNING
Safety belts must be worn by all vehicle
occupants to be properly restrained and
help reduce the risk of injury in a
collision.
*[SR18450( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
All occupants of the vehicle, including the
driver, should always wear their safety
belts, even when an air bag Supplemental
Restraint System is provided.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
18
*[SR18500( ALL)01/95] There are four very important reasons to use
safety belts even with an air bag system. Use
your safety belts to:
*[SR18600( ALL)01/95] ❑help keep you in the proper position (away
from the air bag) when it inflates
*[SR18700( ALL)01/95] ❑reduce the risk of harm in rollover, side or
rear impact collisions, because an air bag is
not designed to inflate in such situations
*[SR18800( ALL)01/95] ❑reduce the risk of harm in frontal collisions
that are not severe enough to activate the
supplemental air bag
*[SR18900( ALL)01/95] ❑reduce the risk of being thrown from your
vehicle
%*[SR19100( ALL)01/95] The Importance of Being Properly Seated
*[SR19200( ALL)05/95] In a collision, the air bag must inflate extremely
fast to help provide additional protection for
you. In order to do this, the air bag must inflate
with considerable force. If you are not seated in
a normal riding position with your back against
the seatback, the air bag may not protect you
properly and could possibly hurt you as it
inflates.
*[SR19230( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If a passenger is not properly seated and
restrained, an inflating air bag could cause
serious injury.
*[SR19235( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Rear-facing infant seats should never be
placed in the front seat.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
19
[SR19240( ALL)06/09] In rear-facing infant seats, the infant’s head is
closer to the air bag. The force of the rapidly
inflating air bag could push the top of the
rear-facing seat against the vehicle seatback,
center console (if so equipped), or center
armrests (if so equipped). REAR-FACING
INFANT SEATS MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED
IN THE REAR SEAT, and other child safety
seats and infant seats should be secured in the
rear seat whenever possible.
*[SR19260( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a right front
passenger air bag. Air bags deploy with great
force, faster than the blink of an eye. Front
passengers, especially children and small adults,
must never sit on the front edge of the seat,
stand near the glove compartment of the
instrument panel, or lean over near the air bag
cover when the vehicle is moving. All occupants
should sit with their backs against the seatback,
move the seat to the most rearward position if
possible and use the safety belts. Children
weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg) always should
use child or infant seats.
%*[SR19300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
*[SR19325( GV)05/95] THE FORCE OF THE RAPIDLY INFLATING
PASSENGER AIR BAG COULD PUSH THE TOP
OF THE REAR-FACING SEAT AGAINST THE
VEHICLE SEATBACK, ARMRESTS OR
CONSOLE. REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
MUST ALWAYS BE SECURED IN THE REAR
SEAT.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
20
*[SR19400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not place objects or mount equipment
on or near the air bag cover on the
steering wheel or in front seat areas that
may come in contact with a deploying air
bag. Failure to follow this instruction may
increase the risk of personal injury in the
event of a collision.
*[SR19405( ALL)05/95] For additional important safety information on
the proper use of seat belts, child seats, and
infant seats, please read the other sections of this
part of the Owner Guide, especially sections
entitled Safety Belts for Children and Safety Seats
for Children.
*[SR19410( ALL)05/95] For further information about the proper
mounting of equipment in the front seat of this
vehicle, please refer to Ford’s brochure entitled
Some Important Information About Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System which can be
obtained by calling Helm Inc. at 1-800-782-4356.
Ask for brochure FPS-8602.
%*[SR19500( ALL)01/95] How the Air Bag Supplemental Restraint
System Operates
[SR19650( ALL)05/95] The driver air bag is in the center of the steering
wheel. The right front passenger seat air bag is
in the upper right hand section of the
instrument panel ledge above the glove
compartment. Both air bags are designed to stay
out of sight until they are activated.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
21
[SR20200( GV)10/94]
half page art:0010671-G
The location of the air bag and warning labels
*[SR20800( ALL)05/95] If a collision occurs, the sensors sense the
severity of the impact and activates the air bags
if necessary. The air bag system is designed to
deploy in frontal and front-angled collisions
more severe than hitting a parked vehicle (of
similar size and weight) head-on at about
28 mph (45 km/h). Because the system senses
the crash severity rather than vehicle speed,
some frontal collisions at speeds above 28 mph
(45 km/h) will not inflate the air bag.
*[SR20930( ALL)05/95] The whole inflation and deflation process takes
place in a matter of seconds.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
22
*[SR20960( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Air bag system components get hot after
inflation. Do not touch them after
inflation.
*[SR21110( ALL)03/93]
half page art:0011063-A
Inflated driver side air bag
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
23
[SR21130( ALL)10/94]
half page art:0011064-A
Inflated right front passenger side air bag
*[SR22200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If the air bag is inflated, THE AIR BAG
WILL NOT FUNCTION AGAIN AND
MUST BE REPLACED IMMEDIATELY. If
the air bag is not replaced, the unrepaired
area will increase the risk of injury in a
collision.
*[SR22210( ALL)05/95] The air bag system uses a readiness light and a
tone to indicate the condition of the system. The
readiness light is in the instrument cluster. When
you turn the ignition to the ON position, this
light will illuminate for approximately six (6)
seconds and then turn off. This indicates that the
system is operating normally. NOTE:
Maintenance of the air bag system is not
required.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
24
%*[SR22220( ALL)05/95] A problem with the system is indicated by one
or more of the following:
[SR22225( ALL)05/95] ❑the readiness light will either flash or stay lit,
or
[SR22230( ALL)05/95] ❑it will not light immediately after the ignition
is turned on, or
[SR22240( ALL)05/95] ❑a group of five beeps will be heard.
*[SR22250( ALL)05/95] If any of these things happen, have the air bag
system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately. Unless serviced, the air bag
supplemental restraint system may not function
properly in the event of a collision.
*[SR22260( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not attempt to service, repair, or
modify the Air Bag Supplemental
Restraint System or its fuses. See your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
%*[SR22300( ALL)05/95]
Disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
vehicles
*[SR22400( ALL)05/95] For disposal of air bags or air bag equipped
vehicles, see your local Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer. Air bags MUST be disposed of by
qualified personnel.
%*[SR23500( ALL)05/95] Safety Restraints for Children
*[SR23600( ALL)02/95] In the U.S. and Canada, you are required by law
to use safety restraints for children. If small
children ride in your vehicle — this generally
includes children who are four years old or
younger and who weigh 40 pounds (18 kg) or
less — you must put them in safety seats that
are made specially for children. Safety belts
alone do not provide maximum protection for
these children. Check your local and state laws
for specific requirements.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
25
*[SR23700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never let a passenger hold a child on his
or her lap while the vehicle is moving.
The passenger cannot protect the child
from injury in a collision.
*[SR23800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Passengers should not be allowed to ride
in the cargo area. Persons not riding in a
seat with a fastened seat belt are much
more likely to suffer serious injury in a
collision. Cargo should always be secured
to prevent it from shifting and causing
damage to the vehicle or harm to
passengers.
*[SR23900( ALL)05/95] When possible, put children in the rear seat of
your vehicle. Accident statistics suggest that
children are safer when properly restrained in
the rear seating positions than in the front
seating positions.
*[SR24000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
*[SR24100( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Safety belts and seats can become hot in a
vehicle that has been closed up in sunny
weather; they could burn a small child.
Check seat covers and buckles before you
place a child anywhere near them.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
26
*[SR24200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never leave a child unattended in your
vehicle.
%*[SR24250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
When using forward-facing child seats
move the passenger seat as far back from
the instrument panel as possible. NEVER
SECURE REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS
IN THE FRONT SEAT.
%*[SR25100( ALL)01/95] Safety Seats for Children
*[SR25200( ALL)05/95] Use a safety seat that is recommended for the
size and weight of the child. Always follow the
safety seat manufacturer’s instructions when
installing and using the safety seat.
% [SR25225( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends the use of a child safety seat
having a top tether strap. Install the child safety
seat in a seating position which is capable of
providing a tether anchorage. For more
information on top tether straps see your Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[SR25250( ALL)02/95] When installing a child safety seat, be sure to
use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating
position, and make sure the tongue is securely
fastened in the buckle.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
27
*[SR25275( ALL)05/95] Children weighing less than 40 lbs. (18 kg)
should use child or infant seats. Forward facing
child seats must have the passenger seat moved
as far back from the instrument panel as
possible.
%*[SR25300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS SHOULD
NEVER BE USED IN THE FRONT SEAT.
REAR-FACING INFANT SEATS MUST
ALWAYS BE PLACED IN THE REAR
SEAT. Failure to follow these instructions
could result in serious injury.
*[SR25350( ALL)05/95] All child restraint systems are designed to be
secured in vehicle seats by lap belts or by the
lap portion of a lap-shoulder belt.
*[SR25400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If you do not properly secure the safety
seat, the child occupying the seat may be
injured during a collision or sudden stop.
An unsecured safety seat could also injure
other passengers.
*[SR25500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Carefully follow all of the manufacturer’s
instructions included with the safety seat
you put in your vehicle. If you do not
install and use the safety seat properly,
the child may be injured in a sudden stop
or collision.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
28
% [SR31857( GV)03/95] Installing Safety Seats in the Front and
Rear Outboard Passenger Seating Positions
[SR31861( ALL)03/95] For seating positions equipped with a dual
locking mode retractor, use the following
procedure.
[SR31865( ALL)03/95] If you choose to install a child safety seat or
infant carrier in the front seating positions, move
vehicle seat as far back as possible.
*[SR31870( ALL)04/95] 1. Position the child seat in the center of the
passenger seat.
*[SR31875( ALL)04/95] 2. Pull down on shoulder belt, then grasp
shoulder belt and lap belt together. Figure 1.
*[SR31880( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011238-B
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
29
*[SR31885( ALL)04/95] 3. While holding the shoulder and lap belt
portions together, route the tongue through
the child seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions. See Figure 2. Be
sure that the belt webbing is not twisted.
*[SR31890( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011239-B
Routing the lap/shoulder belt
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
30
*[SR31893( ALL)04/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the buckle for that
seating position until you hear and feel the
latch engage. Figure 3. Make sure tongue is
latched securely to buckle by pulling on
tongue.
*[SR31895( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011240-B
Buckling the belt
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
31
*[SR31900( ALL)04/95] 5. Grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and
pull downward until all of the belt is
extracted and a click is heard. At this time,
the retractor is in the automatic locking
mode (child seat restraint mode). Figure 4.
*[SR31902( ALL)04/95] NOTE: The dual-locking mode retractor must
be in the automatic locking mode to
properly restrain a child.
*[SR31905( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011241-A
Setting the retractor to automatic locking mode
*[SR31910( ALL)04/95] 6. Allow the belt to retract. Pull up on the
shoulder webbing. A clicking sound will be
heard as the belt retracts. This indicates the
retractor is in the automatic locking mode.
Push down on the child seat while you pull
up on the belt to remove any slack in the
belt. Figures 5 and 6.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
32
*[SR31915( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011242-A
*[SR31920( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011243-A
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
33
*[SR31925( ALL)04/95] 7. Before placing the child in the child seat,
forcibly tilt the seat from side to side, and
tug it forward to make sure that the seat is
securely held in place, Figure 7.
*[SR31930( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011244-A
Checking that the seat is secure
*[SR31935( ALL)04/95] 8. Double check that the retractor is in the
automatic locking mode. Try to pull more
belt out of the retractor. If you cannot, the
belt is in the automatic locking mode,
Figure 8.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
34
*[SR31940( ALL)04/95]
half page art:0011245-B
Checking the retractor
*[SR31945( ALL)04/95] 9. Check to make sure that the child seat is
properly secured prior to each use. If the
retractor is not locked, repeat steps 4
through 7.
% [SR32150( BCGV)03/95] Installing a Child Safety Seat at the Rear
Center Seating Position with Adjustable
Lap Belt
[SR32160( BCGV)03/95] 1. Lengthen the lap belt. To lengthen the belt,
hold the tongue so that its bottom is
perpendicular to the direction of webbing
while sliding the tongue up the webbing.
[SR32170( BCGV)03/95] 2. Place the child safety seat in the center
seating position.
[SR32180( BCGV)03/95] 3. Route the tongue and webbing through the
child seat according to the child seat
manufacturer’s instructions.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
35
[SR32190( BCGV)03/95] 4. Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle
for the center seating position until you hear
a snap and feel it latch. Make sure the
tongue is securely fastened to the buckle by
pulling on tongue.
[SR32200( BCGV)03/95] 5. Push down on the child seat while pulling
on the loose end of the lap belt webbing to
tighten the belt.
[SR32210( BCGV)03/95] 6. Before placing the child into child seat,
forcibly tilt the child seat from side-to-side
and in forward direction to ensure that the
seat is held securely in place. If the child
seat moves excessively, repeat steps 5
through 6, or properly install the child seat
in a different position.
%*[SR38300( ALL)05/95] Safety Belts for Children
*[SR38400( ALL)05/95] Children who are too large for child safety seats
should always wear safety belts. (See instructions
with your child seat, or contact its manufacturer,
to determine maximum size of child that will
safely fit in the seat.)
*[SR38500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If safety belts are not properly worn and
adjusted as described, the risk of serious
injury to the child in a collision will be
much greater.
*[SR38600(MBCGV )05/95] If the shoulder belt position of one of the lap
and shoulder belts can be positioned so that it
does not cross or rest in front of the child’s face
or neck, the child should wear the lap and
shoulder belt. Moving the child closer to the
center of the vehicle may help provide a good
shoulder belt fit.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
36
[SR38800( GV)12/94] RWARNING
If the shoulder belt cannot be properly
positioned, the child should sit in the
center rear seat and use the lap belt or, if
that seat is unavailable, in the center front
seat and use the lap belt.
*[SR38830( ALL)04/95] To improve the fit of lap and shoulder belts on
children who have outgrown child safety seats,
Ford recommends use of a belt-positioning
booster seat that is labelled as conforming to all
Federal motor vehicle safety standards.
Belt-positioning booster seats raise the child and
provide a shorter, firmer seating cushion that
encourages safer seating posture and better fit of
lap and shoulder belts on the child. A
belt-positioning booster should be used if the
shoulder belt rests in front of the child’s face or
neck, or if the lap belt does not fit snugly on
both thighs, or if the thighs are too short to let
the child sit all the way back on the seat cushion
when the lower legs hang over the edge of the
seat cushion. You may wish to discuss the
specific needs of your child with your
pediatrician.
*[SR38860( ALL)04/95] RWARNING
Do not use a belt-positioning booster with
a lap-only belt.
*[SR38900( ALL)05/95] Lap belts and the lap belt portion of lap and
shoulder belts should always be worn snugly
and below the hips, touching the child’s thighs.
*[SR39000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, children should always ride with
the seatback upright.
File:rcsrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:17:50 1996
47
Warning Lights and
Gauges
*[LG00400( ALL)01/95] The instrument panel (dashboard) on your
vehicle is divided into several different sections.
The illustrations on the following pages show
the major parts of the instrument panel that are
described in this chapter. Some items shown
may not be on all vehicles.
[LG00500( BCGV)05/94] In your vehicle, the warning lights and gauges
are grouped together in the instrument cluster
and the indicator lamp module.
[LG00600( GV)05/94] Your vehicle is equipped with one of the
following clusters:
[LG00710( GV)06/92] ❑a mechanical cluster
[LG00950( GV)05/92] ❑an electronic cluster
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
48
% [LG02450( GV)05/94]
full page art:0010682-I
The mechanical cluster
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
49
*[LG02700( BCGV)06/94] The Mechanical Cluster
*[LG02800( BCGV)06/93] The following warning lights and gauges are on
the mechanical cluster. All of the warning lights
and gauges alert you to possible problems with
your vehicle. Some of the lights listed are
optional. The following sections detail what each
of these indicators means.
%*[LG02900( ALL)03/95] Brake System Warning Light
*[LG03000( ALL)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show two
things — that the parking brake is not fully
released, or that the brake fluid level is low in
the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is
low, the brake system should be checked by a
qualified service technician.
[LG03035( GV)05/95]
one inch art:0010681-C
[LG03100( ALL)01/95] This light comes on when the parking brake is
set, or if it is not set, it comes on briefly when
you turn the ignition key to START. It normally
goes off shortly after the engine starts and you
release the parking brake. If the light stays on
after you have fully released the parking brake,
have the hydraulic brake system serviced.
*[LG03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes
may not be working properly. Have the
brakes checked immediately.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
50
% [LG03475( ALL)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light
(If equipped)
[LG03500( ALL)05/94] This warning light will go on each time you
start your vehicle. If it remains on for longer
than five seconds, you should shut off your
engine and restart. If the anti-lock brake light
stays on, this indicates that the anti-lock feature
is disabled and should receive immediate
attention by a qualified service technician.
Normal braking is not affected unless the brake
warning light is also lit.
*[LG03505( BCGV)01/95] The Anti-Lock Brake System has self-check
capabilities. As previously described, the system
turns on the anti-lock light each time you start
your engine. After the engine is started and the
anti-lock light is out, the system performs
another test the first time the vehicle reaches
14 mph (22 km/h). The system turns on the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) pump motor for
approximately 1/2 second. At this time a
mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal
part of the self-check feature. If a malfunction is
found during this check the anti-lock light will
come on.
[LG03680( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0011194-B
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
51
*[LG03700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If the anti-lock brake system warning
light remains on or comes on while
driving, have the braking system checked
by a qualified service technician as soon
as possible.
[LG03800( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock
system, and the brake warning light is
not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled
but normal brake function remains
operational.
%*[LG04300( ALL)04/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
*[LG04305( ALL)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you to
fasten your safety belt. The following conditions
will take place:
*[LG04316( GV)03/95] ❑If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled when
the ignition is turned to the ON position, the
light will turn on for 1 to 2 minutes and the
chime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.
*[LG04323( GV)03/95] ❑If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while the
light is on or the chime is sounding, both the
light and the chime will turn off.
*[LG04327( GV)03/95] ❑If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before the
ignition is turned to the ON position, neither
the light nor the chime will turn on.
[LG04600( ALL)05/92]
one inch art:0010118-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
52
%*[LG04610( ALL)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light
[LG04620( ALL)05/94] The air bag system uses a readiness light to
indicate the condition of the system. If the
system is functioning properly, the light will
stay on for 6 seconds when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position.
[LG04630( ALL)05/94] If there is a problem with the system, two things
may happen: the readiness light will either flash
or stay lit up, or you will hear a beeping sound.
If either of these things happen, have the air bag
system serviced at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer immediately.
[LG04640(M GV)05/95]
one inch art:0010578-A
%*[LG04700( ALL)01/95] Charging System Light
*[LG04800( ALL)03/95] This light indicates that your battery is not being
charged and that you need to have the electrical
system checked.
[LG04900( ALL)05/92]
one inch art:0010119-A
*[LG05100( ALL)02/95] This light comes on every time you turn the
ignition to the ON or START position (engine
off). The light should go off when the engine
starts and the alternator begins to charge.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
53
*[LG05200( ALL)01/95] If the light stays on or comes on when the
engine is running, have the electrical system
checked as soon as possible.
%*[LG05205( BCGV)05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator
[LG05210( ALL)06/93]
one inch art:0010730-A
*[LG05220( BCGV)01/95] This light tells you that the Transmission Control
Switch (TCS) on the gearshift lever has been
pushed. When the light is on, the transmission
will not shift into overdrive. Depressing the
button on the shifter will return the vehicle to
“overdrive on” mode. The transmission will be
in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is
started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected
when the vehicle was last shut off.
*[LG05230( ALL)04/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when the
TCS is depressed or if the light flashes
when you are driving, have your
vehicle serviced at the first
opportunity. If this condition persists,
damage could occur to the
transmission.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
54
%*[LG07200( ALL)01/95] High Beam Light
*[LG07300( ALL)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps are
turned to high beam or when you flash the
lights.
[LG07400( ALL)05/92]
one inch art:0010125-A
% [LG09200( GV)05/92] Low Fuel Alert Light
[LG09300( GV)03/95] This light comes on when your fuel gauge
indicates between 1/8 and 1/16 of a tank. Your
car must be turned to ON for this light to come
on.
[LG09405( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0010684-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
55
% [LG09410( GV)12/91] Air Suspension Light (If equipped)
[LG09420( GV)05/92] This light tells you if the air suspension needs
repair or if the air suspension switch (in the
trunk on the right side) is OFF.
[LG09430( GV)05/92]
one inch art:0010643-A
[LG09440( GV)05/92] Normally, the light will glow momentarily as
you turn the ignition key to the ON position. If
it glows continuously:
[LG09450( GV)05/92] 1. Safely pull off the road as soon as possible.
Turn the ignition key from ON to OFF and
ON again.
[LG09460( GV)05/92] 2. If the light still glows, check to see if the air
suspension switch is OFF. If it is OFF, push
the switch ON. If it is ON, push the switch
OFF and have the system checked as soon as
possible.
%*[LG11005( ALL)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light
*[LG11015( ALL)03/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)
system consists of the hardware and software
necessary to monitor the operation of the
powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to
check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain
control system during normal operation. If an
emission problem is detected, the Check Engine
Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.
*[LG11020( ALL)03/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may
cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.
Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular
phones, and CB radios must be carefully
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
56
installed. Do not install these devices by tapping
into or running wires close to powertrain control
system wires or components.
[LG11045( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0010134-A
*[LG11050( ALL)03/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON, but it should turn off when
the engine starts. If the light does not come on
when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes
on and stays on when you are driving, have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with one of the
vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
*[LG11055( ALL)04/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second
intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it
means that the engine is misfiring. If this
condition persists, damage could occur to the
engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
*[LG11060( ALL)03/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions
while you are driving, it means that a
malfunction occurred and the condition corrected
itself.
*[LG11065( ALL)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself
occurs when an engine running out of fuel
begins to misfire. In this case, the Check Engine
Warning Light may turn on and will then set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the
engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel
was being consumed. After refueling, the Check
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
57
Engine Warning Light will turn off after the
vehicle has completed three consecutive warm
up cycles without a misfire condition occurring.
A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a
cold condition (engine at ambient temperature)
and running until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
*[LG11075( ALL)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine
Warning Light will turn off as soon as the
engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to
have the engine serviced.
*[LG11100( BCGV)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine
Warning Light may come on if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. If the Check Engine
Warning Light comes on and you suspect that
the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the
road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off
the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,
making sure it is properly seated.
*[LG11200( ALL)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up
cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the
Check Engine Warning Light should turn off. If
the light does not go off after the fourth engine
restart, have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer or a qualified technician.
%*[LG12910( ALL)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights
*[LG12920( ALL)05/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the
direction in which you are going to be turning.
[LG12950( ALL)06/93]
one inch art:0010525-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
58
%*[LG13000( ALL)01/95] Fuel Gauge
[LG13050( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010695-A
The fuel gauge
[LG13100( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge displays approximately how
much fuel is in the fuel tank only when the
ignition switch is ON. For proper fuel gauge
indication after adding fuel, turn the ignition
switch OFF while refueling the vehicle.
[LG13150( ALL)08/93] The fuel gauge indicator may vary slightly when
the vehicle is in motion. The most accurate
reading is obtained with the vehicle on level
ground.
*[LG13200( ALL)08/93] With ignition switch OFF, the fuel gauge
indicator may drift from the ignition switch ON
position.
%*[LG13400( ALL)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
*[LG13550( ALL)03/95] This gauge indicates the temperature of the
engine coolant, not the coolant level. If the
coolant is not at its proper level or mixture, the
gauge indication will not be accurate.
[LG13600( ALL)03/94] The pointer moves from the C (cold) mark into
the NORMAL band as your engine coolant
warms up. Under normal driving conditions, the
pointer should stay in the NORMAL band. It is
acceptable for the pointer to fluctuate within the
NORMAL band under normal driving
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
59
conditions, and under certain driving conditions
such as, heavy stop and go traffic, or driving up
hills in hot weather, for the pointer to indicate at
the top of the NORMAL band.
[LG13650( ALL)05/94] If, under any circumstances, the pointer moves
above the NORMAL band, the engine is
overheating and continued operation may cause
engine damage.
% [LG13740( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0010697-C
The engine coolant temperature gauge
*[LG14100( ALL)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:
*[LG14200( ALL)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*[LG14300( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn off the engine.
*[LG14400( ALL)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE
COOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL
THE ENGINE IS COOL.
*[LG14500( ALL)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the
instructions on checking and adding coolant
to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the
Index. If you do not follow these
instructions, you or others could be injured.
*[LG14600( ALL)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the
coolant system serviced.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
60
%*[LG14800( ALL)01/95] Speedometer
*[LG14900( ALL)01/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles
(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving.
%*[LG15000( ALL)01/95] Odometer
*[LG15100( ALL)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles
(kilometers) your vehicle has been driven.
%*[LG15200( ALL)11/94] Trip Odometer
*[LG15300( ALL)03/93] If you want to track your mileage up to 999.9
miles (kilometers), use the trip odometer. Simply
set the trip odometer to zero by pressing the
reset button firmly when beginning the distance
you wish to measure.
*[LG15350( ALL)01/95] Since the trip odometer displays distance
independent of the odometer it will not always
advance to the next mile (kilometer) at the same
time as the odometer.
% [LG16220( ALL)05/94] Battery Voltage Gauge (If Equipped)
*[LG16225( ALL)05/94] This gauge shows you the battery voltage when
the ignition key is in the ON position.
*[LG16230( ALL)05/94] If the battery is operating under cold weather
conditions, the pointer may indicate in the upper
range of the NORMAL band while the battery is
charging. If you are running electrical accessories
(when the engine is off, or idling at a low
speed), the pointer may move toward the lower
end of the NORMAL band.
*[LG16260( ALL)05/94] If it stays outside the NORMAL band, have your
vehicle’s electrical system checked as soon as it
is safely possible.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
61
[LG16291( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0010699-C
The battery voltage gauge
%*[LG16300( ALL)05/94] Engine Oil Pressure Gauge
[LG16500( ALL)05/94] This gauge indicates the engine oil pressure, not
the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil level
is low, it could affect the oil pressure. With the
engine running, the pointer should move into
the NORMAL band. If the pointer drops below
the NORMAL band while the engine is running,
you have lost oil pressure and continued
operation will cause severe engine damage.
*[LG16600( ALL)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:
*[LG16700( ALL)01/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*[LG16800( ALL)04/95] 2. Shut off the engine immediately or severe
engine damage could result.
[LG16900( ALL)05/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the
instructions on checking and adding engine
oil, see the Engine Oil in the Index. If you do
not follow these instructions, you or others
could be injured. To assure an accurate
reading, your car should be on level ground.
[LG17000( ALL)05/94] 4. If the level is low, add oil as necessary
before you start the engine again. Do not
overfill. Do not operate the engine if the
pointer is below the NORMAL band,
regardless of the oil level. Contact your
nearest dealer for further service actions.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
62
[LG17200( ALL)05/94] For more information about adding oil, see
Engine Oil Recommendations in the Index.
%*[LG23800( GV)01/95] The Electronic Cluster
*[LG23900( GV)01/95] The electronic cluster works only when your
ignition is in the ON position. Each time you
start your vehicle, the displays go through a
self-test by flashing on and off once before the
actual readings are displayed. (Neither the turn
signals nor the high beam indicator light will
flash like the other indicators do for the
self-test.) Some of the warning lights will flash
on and remain on (will not immediately flash
off) until the normal cluster display is lit. This
self-test is used to indicate that all of the
warning/indicator lights are working properly.
*[LG24000( GV)01/95] Your electronic cluster tells you about the
condition of your vehicle by using two types of
equipment:
*[LG24100( GV)01/95] ❑warning lights and gauges
*[LG24300( GV)01/95] ❑message center
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
63
[LG24600( GV)03/94]
full page art:0010150-I
Electronic cluster
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
64
%*[LG24605( GV)01/95] Engine Coolant Temperature Gauge
% [LG24610( GV)03/94]
one third page art:0010570-B
*[LG24615( GV)01/95] This gauge indicates the engine coolant
temperature not the coolant level. If the coolant
is not at its proper level or mixture, the gauge
indication will not be accurate. It is identified by
a thermometer symbol, an “H” (hot), and a “C”
(cold). The “NORMAL” indicates the normal
operating range. The bars will move into the
normal operating range as the engine coolant
warms up. It is acceptable under certain driving
conditions such as, heavy stop and go traffic, or
driving up hills in hot weather, for the gauge to
indicate at the top of the NORMAL band.
*[LG24618( GV)05/95] If, under any circumstance, the pointer moves
above the NORMAL band, the temperature
symbol flashes and a tone will sound to alert the
driver that the engine coolant is overheating and
continued operation may cause engine damage.
*[LG24620( GV)01/95] If your engine coolant overheats:
*[LG24622( GV)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as it is safely
possible.
*[LG24624( GV)03/95] 2. Turn off the engine. If you do not stop the
engine as soon as safely possible, severe
engine damage could result.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
65
*[LG24626( GV)05/95] 3. Let the engine cool. DO NOT REMOVE
COOLANT SYSTEM FILL CAP UNTIL
THE ENGINE IS COOL.
*[LG24628( GV)04/95] 4. Check the coolant level following the
instructions on checking and adding coolant
to your engine, see Engine Coolant in the
Index. If you do not follow these
instructions, you or others could be injured.
*[LG24630( GV)01/95] If the coolant continues to overheat, have the
coolant system serviced.
*[LG24635( GV)01/95] If only the top two and bottom two bars appear
on the gauge, then the system is indicating that
it requires servicing. Contact your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
%*[LG25700( GV)04/95] Safety Belt Warning Light and Chime
*[LG25750( GV)03/95] This warning light and chime remind you to
fasten your safety belt. The following conditions
will take place:
*[LG25802( GV)03/95] ❑If the driver’s safety belt is not buckled when
the ignition is turned to the ON position, the
light will turn on for 1 to 2 minutes and the
chime will sound for 4 to 8 seconds.
*[LG25851( GV)03/95] ❑If the driver’s safety belt is buckled while the
light is on or the chime is sounding, both the
light and the chime will turn off.
*[LG25901( GV)03/95] ❑If the driver’s safety belt is buckled before the
ignition is turned to the ON position, neither
the light nor the chime will turn on.
[LG26000( GV)06/93]
one inch art:0010118-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
66
%*[LG27000( GV)01/95] High Beam Light
*[LG27100( GV)03/95] This light comes on when the headlamps are
turned to high beam or when you flash the
lights.
[LG27200( GV)06/93]
one inch art:0010156-A
%*[LG27600( GV)03/95] Check Engine Warning Light
*[LG27650( GV)03/95] The Powertrain On-Board Diagnostic II (OBD II)
system consists of the hardware and software
necessary to monitor the operation of the
powertrain. The OBD II system is designed to
check the function of the vehicle’s powertrain
control system during normal operation. If an
emission problem is detected, the Check Engine
Warning Light (in the cluster) is turned on.
*[LG27750( GV)03/95] Modification or additions to the vehicle may
cause incorrect operation of the OBD II system.
Additions such as burglar alarms, cellular
phones, and CB radios must be carefully
installed. Do not install these devices by tapping
into or running wires close to powertrain control
system wires or components.
[LG27800( GV)06/93]
one inch art:0010153-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
67
*[LG27810( GV)03/95] The light comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON, but it should turn off when
the engine starts. If the light does not come on
when you turn the ignition to ON or if it comes
on and stays on when you are driving, have
your vehicle serviced as soon as possible. This
indicates a possible problem with one of the
vehicle’s emission control systems. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
*[LG27815( GV)04/95] If the light turns on and off at one (1) second
intervals while you are driving the vehicle, it
means that the engine is misfiring. If this
condition persists, damage could occur to the
engine or catalytic convertor. Have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. You do not
need to have your vehicle towed in.
*[LG27820( GV)03/95] If the light turns on and off on rare occasions
while you are driving, it means that a
malfunction occurred and the condition corrected
itself.
*[LG27825( GV)03/95] An example of a condition which corrects itself
occurs when an engine running out of fuel
begins to misfire. In this case, the Check Engine
Warning Light may turn on and will then set a
Diagnostic Trouble Code indicating that the
engine was misfiring while the last of the fuel
was being consumed. After refueling, the Check
Engine Warning Light will turn off after the
vehicle has completed three consecutive warm
up cycles without a misfire condition occurring.
A warm up cycle consists of engine start from a
cold condition (engine at ambient temperature)
and running until the engine reaches normal
operating temperature.
*[LG27850( GV)03/95] On the fourth engine start up, the Check Engine
Warning Light will turn off as soon as the
engine begins to crank. It is not necessary to
have the engine serviced.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
68
*[LG27900( GV)05/95] Under certain conditions, the Check Engine
Warning Light may come on if the fuel cap is
not properly installed. If the Check Engine
Warning Light comes on and you suspect that
the fuel cap is not properly installed, pull off the
road as soon as it is safely possible and turn off
the engine. Remove and replace the fuel cap,
making sure it is properly seated.
*[LG27950( GV)05/95] After completing the three consecutive warm up
cycles and on the fourth engine start up, the
Check Engine Warning Light should turn off. If
the light does not go off after the fourth engine
restart, have your vehicle serviced by your
dealer or a qualified technician.
%*[LG28101( GV)01/95] Air Bag Readiness Light
[LG28102( GV)02/93] The Air Bag Readiness light will go on each
time you start your vehicle and will remain on
for about 6-8 seconds indicating normal air bag
operation. If this light stays on continuously or
flashes, or if the light never comes on at all,
there is something wrong with the Air Bag
Supplemental Restraint System and your vehicle
should be taken in for service to the nearest
Lincoln-Mercury dealer as soon as possible.
Unless serviced, the Air Bag Supplemental
Restraint System may not function properly in
the event of a collision.
[LG28103( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010514-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
69
%*[LG28104( GV)01/95] Charging System Warning Light
*[LG28105( GV)01/95] This light comes on when you turn your ignition
key from OFF to ON. The light should go out
when the engine starts and the alternator begins
to charge.
*[LG28106( GV)01/95] If this light stays on or comes on while your
engine is running, this tells you that your
battery is not being charged and that you need
to have the electrical system checked as soon as
possible.
[LG28107( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010533-A
%*[LG28108( GV)01/95] Engine Oil Pressure Light
[LG28109( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010532-A
[LG28110( GV)06/93] This light indicates the engine oil pressure, not
the oil level. However, if your engine’s oil level
is low, it could affect the oil pressure. The light
should come on every time your ignition key is
turned to ON or START, and should go out
when the engine starts. If the light stays on or
turns on while the engine is running, you have
lost oil pressure and continued operation will
cause severe engine damage.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
70
*[LG28111( GV)03/95] If you lose engine oil pressure:
*[LG28112( GV)03/95] 1. Pull off the road as soon as safely possible.
*[LG28113( GV)01/95] 2. Shut off the engine immediately. If you do
not stop the engine as soon as safely
possible, severe engine damage could result.
[LG28114( GV)07/94] 3. Check the engine’s oil level, following the
instructions on checking and adding engine
oil, see Engine Oil in the Index. If you do
not follow these instructions, you or others
could be injured. To assure an accurate
reading, your vehicle should be on level
ground.
[LG28115( GV)06/93] 4. If the level is low, add only as much oil as
necessary before you start the engine again.
Do not overfill. Do not operate the engine if
the light is on, regardless of the oil level.
Contact your nearest dealer for service as
soon as possible.
*[LG28117( GV)01/95] For more information about adding oil, see
Adding engine oil in the Servicing Your Vehicle
chapter of this guide.
%*[LG28120( GV)04/95] Turn Signal Indicator Lights
*[LG28122( GV)05/95] The turn signal arrow will flash to indicate the
direction in which you are going to be turning.
[LG28137( GV)06/93]
one inch art:0010525-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
71
%*[LG28140( GV)01/95] Speed Control Indicator Light
*[LG28150( GV)01/95] This light comes on when the speed control
system is actively maintaining the set speed. It
will go off when the brakes are used or if the
speed control is turned off.
[LG28160( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010648-A
*[LG28170( GV)01/95] This light does not indicate any problems but is
only a convenience to tell when the speed
control is active.
%*[LG29700( GV)01/95] Fuel Gauge
[LG30810( GV)03/94]
one third page art:0010516-B
[LG30860( GV)03/95] The fuel gauge tells you approximately how
many gallons/liters of fuel you have in the tank.
[LG30870( GV)03/93] When your tank reaches 1/8 or approximately
2 gallons (8 liters), a flashing fuel pump will
appear.
[LG30880( GV)03/92] Turn the ignition switch off while fueling to
obtain an accurate fuel gauge indication.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
72
[LG30885( GV)05/94] NOTE: At least 2.5 gallons (9.5 liters) of fuel
must be added for the fuel gauge to
immediately show the new level of
fuel. If less than 2.5 gallons (9.5 liters)
of fuel is added, the gauge will reach
the new level slowly.
[LG30890( GV)10/90] If the fuel gauge displays only the top two bars
and the bottom two bars, or, if fuel remaining or
distance to empty functions display CO or CS,
then there is a problem. Take your vehicle in for
service.
[LG30900( GV)03/92] When you turn the ignition key to the ON or
ACC position, all the display segments will light
up, then go off for a second indicating the gauge
is working. Then the gauge will show you how
much fuel you have in the tank.
%*[LG31000( GV)01/95] FUEL REMAIN — Fuel Remaining
[LG31100( GV)05/95]
one inch art:0010526-C
*[LG31200( GV)01/95] This function shows you how many gallons
(liters) of fuel you have left in the fuel tank.
[LG31300( GV)03/94] If your fuel level is above 20 gallons (76 liters),
the letter “F” (full) will appear on the display.
But if your fuel level has dropped to below
1 gallon (4 liters), the letter “E” (empty) will
appear in the display.
*[LG31400( GV)01/95] Because of factors like rounding of numbers and
fuel movement in the tank, your fuel gauge and
the service station fuel pump readings may
disagree slightly.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
73
*[LG31500( GV)01/95] A problem is indicated if the fuel gauge bar
graph displays only the top two and bottom two
bars and the message center display for Distance
To Empty or Fuel Remaining functions display
the letters “CO” or “CS”. If this happens, contact
your dealer for service as soon as possible.
%*[LG33600( GV)01/95] Speedometer
[LG33700( GV)05/95] The speedometer tells you how many miles
(kilometers) per hour your vehicle is moving. It
indicates the speed up to 120 mph or up to
195 km/h.
*[LG34000( GV)01/95] You can press the E/M (English/Metric) button
located just below the message center display to
show the speed you are going in either miles
per hour or kilometers per hour.
[LG34050( GV)05/95]
quarter page art:0010517-D
%*[LG34100( GV)01/95] Odometer
*[LG34200( GV)01/95] The odometer tells you the total number of miles
or kilometers your vehicle has been driven. If
the cluster is replaced, and the accumulated
mileage on the odometer is unknown, the
replacement cluster will have the circled “S”
illuminated with zero miles on the odometer. If
the actual vehicle mileage can be verified, then
an authorized service center can program the
actual mileage into the odometer of the
replacement cluster. The actual mileage (if
known) or an estimated mileage (if unknown) is
shown on a label affixed on the door pillar.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
74
*[LG34410( GV)01/95] Press the E/M (English/Metric) button located
just below the message center display to show
miles or kilometers.
*[LG34420( GV)01/95] If the odometer displays the word “ERROR”
contact your dealer for service.
%*[LG46700( GV)04/95] The Electronic Message Center
(If equipped)
*[LG46800( GV)01/95] Along with information the warning lights and
gauges provide, the electronic message center
lets you:
*[LG47000( GV)01/95] ❑see problems such as Door Ajar, Air
Suspension, Trunk Ajar, Washer Fluid
*[LG47100( GV)01/95] ❑see how many miles/kilometers you can
drive with the fuel remaining in your tank
[LG47200( GV)05/94] ❑see when overdrive has been turned off
*[LG47300( GV)01/95] ❑monitor your average fuel economy
*[LG47400( GV)01/95] ❑monitor your instantaneous fuel economy
*[LG47600( GV)01/95] ❑check the distance you have travelled during
a trip on either Trip A or Trip B
*[LG47700( GV)01/95] ❑monitor your average speed
[LG47900( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010518-H
Message center display showing all segments on
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
75
% [LG48000( GV)10/90] All of the message center functions are
controlled by the three switches located just
below the message center display:
[LG48030( GV)02/94] ❑E/M — Changes the electronic instrument
cluster display to read in either English or
Metric units.
*[LG48060( GV)01/95] ❑Reset — Sets the selected function to zero
(if resettable).
*[LG48100( GV)01/95] ❑Select — Selects the function. This is a dual
action switch, the right side advances function
to the right, the left side advances function to
the left.
[LG48130( GV)03/94]
one inch art:0010520-C
Buttons for the message center
*[LG48160( GV)01/95]
How to use the message center
*[LG48200( GV)01/95] To reset any function:
*[LG48260( GV)01/95] 1. Push either the right or left side of the
SELECT button to choose the function you
would like to set.
*[LG48300( GV)01/95] 2. Push the RESET button and the selected
message center function will be reset to zero.
(The only functions which can be reset to
zero are: AVG ECON, TRIP A or TRIP B,
and AVG SPEED.)
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
76
*[LG48350( GV)01/95]
What the message center functions can
show you
%*[LG48400( GV)01/95] DIST TO EMPTY — Distance to Empty
(DTE)
[LG48450( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010519-C
Message center display showing the DTE function selected
*[LG48500( GV)01/95] This function estimates how many miles or
kilometers you can drive with the fuel remaining
in your tank under standard driving conditions.
*[LG48600( GV)01/95] Remember to turn off the ignition when filling
up with fuel. Otherwise, the display will not
show the addition of fuel for a few miles.
[LG48625( GV)05/94] NOTE: At least 2.5 gallons (9.5 liters) of fuel
must be added for the fuel gauge to
imediately show the new level of fuel.
*[LG48650( GV)01/95] When you have approximately 50 miles (80 km)
left before you run out of fuel, the DTE function
will flash for five (5) seconds and sound a tone
for one (1) second. The message center will
remain in the DTE function until you push the
select button to change it. This low fuel warning
also happens at 25 miles (40 km), and 10 miles
(16 km).
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
77
*[LG48675( GV)01/95] Displayed DTE will not be equal to AVG ECON
multiplied by the FUEL REMAIN value. This is
because DTE is calculated using a method that
takes into consideration the fuel economy of the
last 500 miles (800 Km) driven.
[LG48700( GV)03/91]
one inch art:0010166-A
*[LG48800( GV)01/95] If “CO” or “CS” is displayed, this means that
there is a problem with the fuel indication
system and you should contact your dealer for
service as soon as possible.
%*[LG50000( GV)01/95] AVG ECON — Average Fuel Economy
*[LG50100( GV)01/95] Select this function to display your average fuel
economy in miles per gallon or liters per
100 kilometers. Your message center computes
this figure using the distance traveled and fuel
used information. If you want to reset this
function, press the RESET button while the
average fuel economy feature is displayed.
[LG50150( GV)03/95] The average shown is the average since the
reset.
[LG50200( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010528-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
78
*[LG50300( GV)01/95] If you calculate your average fuel economy by
dividing miles traveled by gallons used, your
figure may be different than displayed because
of:
*[LG50400( GV)01/95] ❑Your vehicle not being perfectly level during
fill-up
*[LG50500( GV)01/95] ❑Differences in the automatic shut-off points
on the fuel pumps at service stations
*[LG50600( GV)01/95] ❑Variations in top-off procedure from one
fill-up to another
*[LG50700( GV)01/95] ❑Rounding of the displayed values to the
nearest 0.1 gallon (liters) on the fuel gauge.
%*[LG50800( GV)01/95] INST ECON — Instantaneous Fuel
Economy
*[LG50900( GV)01/95] Select this function to calculate your
instantaneous fuel economy. Your instantaneous
fuel economy is the fuel economy you get at any
particular moment. For example, you can see
what your fuel economy is in heavy traffic or on
an open highway.
[LG51000( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010529-A
*[LG51100( GV)01/95] Your vehicle must be moving to calculate fuel
economy. When your vehicle is not moving,
instantaneous fuel economy is displayed at
0 miles per gallon or 99 liters per
100 kilometers. When you are moving, the
display may read anything between 0 and 99
miles/gallon (1 to 99 L/km). Instantaneous fuel
economy cannot be reset.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
79
%*[LG51200( GV)01/95] TRIP A and TRIP B — Elapsed Distance
Traveled
*[LG51300( GV)01/95] These two functions of the message center allow
you to see how far you have traveled since you
last reset. Trip A and Trip B are completely
independent and must be reset individually.
[LG51400( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010530-A
*[LG51500( GV)01/95] To reset either trip feature to zero, press the
RESET button while a trip distance feature
(Trip A or Trip B) is displayed.
[LG51600( GV)05/94] AVG SPEED — Average Speed
[LG51700( GV)05/94] Select this function to display your average
speed in miles per hour or kilometers per hour.
[LG51800( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0011294-A
[LG51900( GV)05/94] Your vehicle must be moving to calculate your
average speed. When your vehicle is not
moving, the average speed is displayed at
0 miles per hour or 0 kilometers per hour.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
80
[LG52200( GV)05/95] Check Air Suspension Light
*[LG52300( GV)01/95] This light glows momentarily when the ignition
is turned to the ON position. With the ignition
on this light will flash five (5) times and sound a
tone for one (1) second, and then the light will
remain on to indicate that the air suspension
switch (located in the trunk on the right side) is
off or to indicate a possible system fault.
*[LG52400( GV)01/95] If the light is displayed while driving and the
air suspension switch is not turned off, safely
pull off the road as soon as possible. Turn the
ignition switch from ON to OFF and to ON
again. If the light continues to be displayed after
flashing five (5) times, turn the air suspension
switch (located in the trunk on the right side) off
and take your vehicle to a dealership for service
as soon as possible.
[LG52500( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010522-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
81
%*[LG52550( GV)05/95] Overdrive Off Indicator
[LG52560( GV)06/92]
one inch art:0010733-B
*[LG52570( GV)01/95] This light tells you that the Transmission Control
Switch (TCS) on the gearshift lever has been
pushed. When the light is on, the transmission
will not shift into overdrive. Depressing the
button on the shifter will return the vehicle to
“overdrive on” mode. The transmission will be
in the “overdrive on” mode when the vehicle is
started even if the O/D OFF mode was selected
when the vehicle was last shut off.
*[LG52571( GV)04/95] NOTE: If the light does not come on when the
TCS is depressed or if the light flashes
when you are driving, have your
vehicle serviced at the first
opportunity. If this condition persists,
damage could occur to the
transmission.
%*[LG52600( GV)01/95] Low Washer Fluid Light
*[LG52700( GV)01/95] This light comes on when there is less than a
quarter of the container of washer fluid left.
With the ignition ON this light will flash five (5)
times and a tone will sound for one (1) second,
and then the light will remain on.
[LG52800( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0010523-B
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
82
%*[LG52900( GV)01/95] Door Ajar Light
*[LG53000( GV)01/95] If one of the doors is not completely shut, this
light comes on when you turn the ignition to
ON. With the ignition on this light will flash
five (5) times and sound a tone for one (1)
second, and then the light will remain on.
[LG53100( GV)10/90]
one inch art:0010531-A
%*[LG53200( GV)01/95] Trunk Ajar Light
*[LG53300( GV)01/95] If the trunk is not completely closed, this light
comes on when you turn the ignition to ON.
With the ignition ON this light will flash five (5)
times and sound a tone for one (1) second, and
then the light will remain on.
[LG53400( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0010524-B
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
83
[LG53500( GV)07/93] Indicator Lamp Module
[LG53600( GV)05/94] The following warning lights are on the
indicator lamp module. The following section
details what each of these indicators mean.
[LG53700( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0011296-A
The indicator lamp module
% [LG53800( GV)05/94] Anti-Theft System Light (If equipped)
[LG53900( GV)05/94] The anti-theft system light illuminates to remind
you that the anti-theft system has been activated.
The indicator light remains on steadily for
approximately 30 seconds after the last door is
closed, and then goes out.
[LG54000( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0011297-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
84
% [LG54200( GV)05/94] Anti-Lock Brake System Light
(If equipped)
*[LG54300( GV)01/95] This warning light will go on each time you
start your vehicle. If it remains on for longer
than 5 seconds, you should shut off your engine
and restart. If the anti-lock brake light stays on,
this indicates that the anti-lock feature is
disabled and should receive immediate attention
by a qualified service technician. Normal braking
is not affected unless the brake warning light is
also lit.
*[LG54400( GV)01/95] The Anti-Lock Brake System has self-check
capabilities. As previously described, the system
turns on the anti-lock light each time you start
your engine. After the engine is started and the
anti-lock light is out, the system performs
another test the first time the vehicle reaches
14 mph (22 km/h). The system turns on the
Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) pump motor for
approximately 1/2 second. At this time a
mechanical noise may be heard. This is a normal
part of the self-check feature. If a malfunction is
found during this check the anti-lock light will
come on.
[LG54500( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0010642-E
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
85
*[LG54550( GV)05/95] RWARNING
If the anti-lock brake system warning
light remains on or comes on while
driving, have the braking system checked
by a qualified service technician as soon
as possible.
[LG54555( GV)05/95] NOTE: If a fault occurs in the anti-lock
system, and the brake warning light is
not lit, the anti-lock system is disabled
but normal brake function remains
operational.
%*[LG54560( GV)03/95] Brake System Light
*[LG54570( GV)03/95] The warning light for the brakes can show two
things — that the parking brake is not fully
released, or that the brake fluid level is low in
the master cylinder reservoir. If the fluid level is
low, the brake system should be checked by a
qualified service technician.
[LG54580( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0010681-C
*[LG54590( GV)01/95] This light comes on briefly when you turn the
ignition key to ON, but it normally goes off
shortly after the engine starts and you release
the parking brake. If the light stays on or comes
on after you have released the parking brake
fully, have the hydraulic brake system serviced.
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
86
*[LG55000( GV)05/95] RWARNING
The BRAKE light indicates that the brakes
may not be working properly. Have the
brakes checked immediately.
% [LG55100( GV)05/94] Hazard Warning Light
[LG55200( GV)05/94] The hazard warning light will blink on and off
continuously when you use the hazard flasher.
See Using the Hazard Flasher in the Steering
Column Controls section.
[LG55300( GV)05/94]
one inch art:0011298-A
File:rclgv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:21:13 1996
87
Instrument Panel Controls
[IP00290( V)10/94]
full page art:0010667-G
Crown Victoria instrument panel
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
88
[IP00400( ALL)05/95] The main controls for the climate control system,
clock, and radio are on the instrument panel.
%*[IP00500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Any cleaner or polish that increases the
gloss (shine) of the upper part of the
instrument panel should be avoided.
The dull finish in this area is to help
protect the driver from undesirable
windshield reflection.
%*[IP00600( ALL)01/95] The Climate Control Systems
[IP00700( ALL)03/91] Your vehicle has one of two different climate
control systems. The two systems are:
[IP01200( BCGV)06/93] ❑a manual heating and air conditioning system
[IP01300( GV)03/94] ❑an electronic automatic temperature control
system
*[IP01400( ALL)09/89] If you are not sure which system your vehicle
has, see the diagrams on the following pages.
% [IP10700( BCGV)08/93] The Manual Heating and Air Conditioning
System
[IP10800( BCGV)08/93] You can heat the inside of your vehicle, defrost
the windshield, and turn on the air conditioning
with the three knobs in the center of the
instrument panel:
[IP10900( BCGV)08/93] ❑FAN
[IP11000( BCGV)08/93] ❑TEMP
[IP11100( BCGV)08/93] ❑SELECT
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
89
[IP11200( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010621-D
The controls for the manual heating and air conditioning
system
[IP11400( GV)05/94] For maximum heating, move the SELECT knob
to FLOOR, move the TEMP knob to the end of
the red range (full clockwise) and move the fan
speed to HI.
% [IP11601( GV)05/94] To heat the interior of your vehicle and defrost
the windshield at the same time, move the
SELECT knob to MIX and select the temperature
and fan speed desired.
[IP11800( GV)05/94] For maximum defrosting, move the SELECT
knob to DEFROST V, move the temperature to
the end of the red range (full clockwise) and
operate the fan as necessary to provide the
volume of air required.
% [IP12000( GV)05/94] For ventilation, move the SELECT knob to VENT
and select the temperature and blower speed
desired.
[IP12200( GV)05/94] To cool the inside of your vehicle quickly, in
warm weather, move the SELECT knob to MAX
A/C, move the TEMP knob to the end of the
blue range (full counterclockwise) and move the
fan to HI.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
90
[IP12400( GV)03/92] If the inside of the vehicle is very warm, drive
for the first few minutes with the windows open
to force the hot, stale air out of the vehicle.
[IP12600( GV)03/94] Fan speed can be reduced, after a comfortable
temperature has been reached, to provide quieter
system operation.
[IP12800( GV)05/94] To cool your vehicle using outside air, move the
SELECT knob to NORM A/C, move the TEMP
knob to the end of the blue range (full
counterclockwise) and set the fan to the desired
speed. Cooling your vehicle in this way provides
quieter operation, but it is not as economical as
MAX A/C.
[IP13000( GV)03/92] The instrument panel registers may be adjusted
to control the quantity and direction of air being
discharged. The thumbwheel controls the volume
of air and the knob in the center of the register
directs the air up and down or side to side.
[IP13200( GV)05/94] When the SELECT knob is moved to OFF, the
system is off and the fan will not operate.
% [IP13300( BCGV)01/89]
Adjusting the panel register airflow
[IP13400( BCGV)03/92] The instrument panel registers may be adjusted
to your comfort needs. The thumbwheel controls
the volume of air and the knob in the center of
the register controls direction up or down or
side to side.
%*[IP15900( GV)04/95] Electronic Automatic Temperature Control
System
*[IP16000( GV)05/95] The control for your Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control (EATC) is located at the
center of the instrument panel and operates only
when the key is in the ON position.
*[IP16100( GV)05/95] The EATC feature maintains the temperature
you select and automatically controls the airflow
for your comfort. It also allows you to override
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
91
the automatic operation with manual override
buttons.
[IP16200( GV)03/95]
half page art:0011299-D
The controls for the electronic automatic temperature
control
*[IP16300( GV)02/95] To turn your EATC on, push the AUTOMATIC
button or any of the six override buttons along
the bottom of the control.
*[IP16400( GV)02/95] To turn your EATC off, press the OFF button.
When the system is off, the display window will
be blank (dark) except when OUTSIDE TEMP
has been selected. Then, OUTSIDE TEMP and
the temperature will appear in the window.
*[IP16500( GV)01/95] If you select AUTOMATIC, the system will
automatically determine fan speed and airflow
location. If an override button is selected, your
selection determines airflow location only. Fan
speed remains automatic unless you override it
by rotating the vertical thumbwheel located at
the extreme right of the control panel.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
92
*[IP16600( GV)02/95] To change the temperature in the display
window, select any temperature between 65˚F
(18˚C) and 85˚F (29˚C) using the BLUE (cooler)
or RED (warmer) buttons. The Electronic
Automatic Temperature Control will do the rest.
*[IP16700( GV)02/95] If you want continuous maximum cooling, push
the BLUE button until 60˚F (16˚C) is shown in
the display window. Your EATC will cool at
maximum and disregard the 60˚F (16˚C) setting
until you select a warmer temperature with the
RED button. If you want continuous maximum
heating, push the RED button until 90˚F (32˚C)
is shown in the display window. Your EATC
will provide maximum heat regardless of the
90˚F (32˚C) setting until you select a cooler
temperature with the BLUE button.
[IP16800( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0011300-B
*[IP16900( GV)03/95] The display window tells you how the system is
operating. It will indicate the selected
temperature and the operating function you
have chosen; AUTO or one of the six manual
overrides. It will also indicate manual
(thumbwheel) control of the fan speed with the
Hsymbol. The display window with all possible
displays and their positions are shown here.
Normally not all are shown at the same time but
are included here to familiarize you with the
names and symbols.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
93
*[IP17000( GV)01/95]
Automatic operation
*[IP17100( GV)02/95] Push the AUTOMATIC button and select the
desired temperature. The selected temperature
and AUTO will be shown in the display
window. The EATC will automatically heat or
cool to achieve the set temperature. Under
normal conditions, your EATC will need no
additional attention.
[IP17200( GV)05/95]
quarter page art:0011301-C
*[IP17300( GV)02/95] When in AUTOMATIC and weather conditions
require heat, air will be sent to the floor. But, a
feature is included in your EATC to prevent
blowing cold air to the floor if the engine
coolant is not warm enough to allow heating.
For a short time the fan will be at low speed
and air directed to the windshield. In 3-1/2
minutes or less, the fan speed will start to
increase and the airflow will change to the floor
area.
*[IP17400( GV)02/95] If unusual conditions exist (i.e., window fogging,
etc.), the six manual override buttons allow you
to select special air discharge locations. A
thumbwheel allows you to adjust the fan speed
to suit your needs.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
94
*[IP17500( GV)03/95]
Temperature selection
*[IP17600( GV)05/95] The RED and BLUE buttons at the upper left of
the Control are for temperature selection. The
RED button will increase the set temperature
and the BLUE button will lower the set
temperature. Pressing a button and releasing it
will change the set temperature one degree.
Holding either button in will rapidly change the
temperature setting in one degree increments to
either 65˚F (18˚C) (BLUE) or 85˚F (29˚C)(RED).
Then, the set temperature will jump 5˚ and stop
at either 60˚F (16˚C) which is maximum cooling
or 90˚F (32˚C) which is maximum heating.
[IP17700( GV)03/95]
one third page art:0011302-C
*[IP17800( GV)06/94] The average temperature range used is between
68˚F (20˚C) and 78˚F (26˚C). Changing the
temperature setting by several degrees outside
this range will not speed up the heating or
cooling process.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
95
*[IP17900( GV)01/95]
Temperature display
*[IP18000( GV)01/95] The selected temperature displayed in the
window can be set for either 0˚F or 0˚C. Your
car may have an English/Metric (E/M) Button
to change your speedometer from miles to
kilometers. When pressed, this button also
changes the temperature display. With or
without an E/M Button, the temperature display
can also be changed to 0˚F or 0˚C using the
MAX A/C and DEFrost override buttons.
[IP18100( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0011303-D
*[IP18201( GV)01/95] To change the temperature display to 0˚F or 0˚C,
press and hold the MAX A/C and DEF Buttons
at the same time for 3/4 second. The display
will change. If you continue to press the two
buttons, the display will continuously switch
between 0˚F and 0˚C. If the temperature display
does not agree with the speedometer on vehicles
with an E/M button, pressing the E/M button
will make them agree.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
96
*[IP18301( GV)01/95]
Fan speed and thumbwheel
*[IP18401( GV)02/95] Your EATC automatically adjusts the fan speed
to the existing conditions. You must push
AUTOMATIC for automatic fan speed operation.
To control the fan speed yourself, use the
thumbwheel which will cancel the automatic fan
speed control. The thumbwheel is located at the
extreme right side of the EATC control panel. It
is a vertical control marked with a fan symbol.
Rotate up for HI and down for LO speeds.
[IP18501( GV)03/95]
one third page art:0011304-B
*[IP18601( GV)03/95] When you move the thumbwheel, the fan speed
will go to manual control. The display window
will show the Hsymbol in the lower right
corner along with the selected temperature and
operating function.
[IP18701( GV)05/95]
quarter page art:0011305-C
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
97
*[IP18801( GV)02/95] You can override the fan speed at any time. If
you use the thumbwheel to override the fan
speed, the EATC will continue to control the
temperature but you control the fan speed. To
return to auto fan control, press the
AUTOMATIC button. If you are operating in
one of the override functions (FLOOR, MAX
A/C, etc.), automatic fan control will continue
unless you rotate the fan thumbwheel. To return
to automatic fan control, press the AUTOMATIC
button. The EATC will return to Automatic
operation. If you want to return to any override
function, press the button for that function. The
fan speed will continue to be automatically
controlled.
*[IP18901( GV)01/95]
Manual override buttons
*[IP19001( GV)02/95] Your EATC has six buttons which allow you to
make special selections. The buttons are located
along the bottom edge of the EATC control and
allow you to determine where the air will be
discharged. Pressing any override button
changes the air discharge location only. It does
not affect the ability of the system to control
temperature or the fan speed. Return to fully
Automatic operation by pushing the
AUTOMATIC button.
*[IP19101( GV)01/95] MAX A/C button
[IP19201( GV)05/94] The MAX A/C feature allows for faster cooling
because air is drawn from inside the car. Using
inside air causes the fan to sound louder which
is normal for this selection. The Display window
will indicate MAX A/C under the selected
temperature. The airflow will be from the
instrument panel registers.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
98
*[IP19301( GV)01/95] NORM A/C button
*[IP19400( GV)01/95] When you push this button, you select air
conditioning using outside air. The Display
window will indicate A/C under the selected
temperature. The cooled air will flow from the
instrument panel registers. The fan speed will
continue on automatic.
%*[IP19500( GV)01/95] VENT button
[IP19600( GV)03/95] Push this button to select outside air through the
instrument panel registers. The display window
will show the set temperature and VENT to the
lower right of the temperature. Your EATC will
heat the air if the temperature you have selected
is warmer than the outside air coming into the
vehicle. However, the air will NOT be cooled
regardless of the temperature setting. Airflow
will be from the instrument panel registers.
*[IP19700( GV)02/95] FLOOR button
*[IP19800( GV)05/95] Airflow will be to the floor when the FLOOR
button is pressed. The display window will
show the set temperature and FLR to the left of
the temperature. The air cannot be cooled in the
FLOOR position, only heated. Fan speed will be
automatic unless manually controlled. If you
override the fan speed and wish to return to
automatic fan control, push AUTOMATIC. Then,
again select FLOOR for airflow to the floor.
%*[IP19900( GV)02/95] FLR & DEF button
[IP20000( GV)03/95] Push this button to get air to the floor and
windshield defrosters at the same time. The
display will show the set temperature, FLR and
the Defrost symbol Vto indicate FLR-DEF has
been selected. If the outside temperature is about
50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will be
dehumidified to remove moisture. This will help
to prevent fogging in humid weather.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
99
*[IP20100( GV)02/95] DEF Vbutton
[IP20200( GV)03/95] Press the DEF Vbutton to obtain maximum
airflow to the windshield. Adjust the
temperature setting as required for defrosting.
The Display window will show the temperature
setting with the defrost symbol Vto the left of
the temperature. When the outside temperature
is about 50˚F (10˚C) and above, the air will be
dehumidified to remove moisture. This will help
prevent fogging in humid weather.
*[IP20300( GV)04/95] OUTSIDE TEMP button
*[IP20400( GV)01/95] By pressing this button the temperature of the
air outside of the vehicle will show in the
display. The outside temperature will continue to
be displayed until the OUTSIDE TEMP button is
pressed again to cancel. If the selected
temperature setting is changed while the outside
temperature is displayed, the new selected
temperature will be displayed for 4 seconds after
it is changed. Then, the outside temperature will
return to the window. If a manual override is
pressed or the thumbwheel is rotated while the
outside temperature is displayed, the window
will show the change for 4 seconds. Then, the
outside temperature will return along with the
changed override selection.
[IP20500( GV)05/95]
quarter page art:0011306-C
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
100
*[IP20600( GV)02/95] If the EATC is turned OFF while the outside
temperature is displayed, the temperature will
continue to be displayed. Press the OUTSIDE
TEMP button to clear the display window. When
the ignition key is turned OFF the display will
be blank (dark).
*[IP20700( GV)01/95] NOTE: The outside temperature reading is
most accurate when the vehicle is
moving. Higher readings may be
obtained when the vehicle is not
moving. The readings that you get may
not agree with temperatures given on
the radio due to differences in vehicle
and station locations.
*[IP20800( GV)04/95]
Operating tips
*[IP20900( GV)04/95] The following tips will help you to get the most
satisfaction from your Electronic Automatic
Temperature Control system.
*[IP21000( GV)02/95] ❑In humid weather, select DEF Vbefore
starting your engine. This will help to
prevent windshield fogging. After a few
minutes of operation, switch to AUTOMATIC
or an override selection of your choice.
*[IP21100( GV)04/95] ❑To prevent humidity buildup inside your
vehicle, always drive with the EATC System
turned on.
*[IP21200( GV)03/95] ❑Do not put objects under the front seats that
interfere with the flow of air to the back seat
area.
*[IP21300( GV)04/95] ❑Remove any snow, ice, or leaves from the air
intake area of your EATC System which
could block the air intake. The intake area is
located at the bottom of the windshield,
under the hood at the passenger side rear
corner.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
101
*[IP21400( GV)04/95]
Service
*[IP21500( GV)04/95] If your EATC is not operating as described here,
take it to your dealer to have it checked. System
diagnostics are built in which will allow your
dealer to readily identify problems that might
occur.
% [IP31800( GV)12/91] Rear Window Defroster
*[IP32000( ALL)12/91] The defroster for the rear window clears frost,
fog, or thin ice from both the inside and outside
of the rear window.
[IP32800( GV)03/94] The button for the rear window defroster is
located on the left hand (driver’s) side of the
instrument panel.
[IP32900( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0010191-F
The button that controls the rear window defroster
[IP33000( ALL)12/94] Clear away any snow that is on the rear
window before using the defroster. With the
engine running, push the defrost button.
[IP33100( ALL)12/94] After approximately 10 minutes, the defroster
will turn off. If the window is still not clear,
turn the defroster on again.
[IP33200( ALL)12/94] The defroster will turn off when the ignition key
is turned to the OFF position.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
102
*[IP33300( ALL)02/95] The heating elements are bonded to the inside of
the rear window. Do not use sharp objects to
scrape the inside of the rear window or use
abrasive cleaners to clean it. Doing so could
damage the heating elements.
%*[IP34200( ALL)01/95] The Interior and Exterior Lights
%*[IP34310( ALL)01/95] Daytime Running Light System
*[IP34312( ALL)03/95]
(Canadian vehicles only)
*[IP34320( ALL)03/95] The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system turns
the high beam headlamps on, with a reduced
light output, when:
*[IP34325( ALL)03/95] ❑The headlamp system is in the OFF position,
and
*[IP34330( ALL)03/95] ❑The vehicle is running, and
*[IP34340( ALL)01/95] ❑The vehicle has a fully released parking
brake.
*[IP34360( BCGV)01/95] NOTE: If you have a vehicle with an
automatic lighting system, the DRL
system is active until the automatic
system turns on the headlamps.
*[IP34363( ALL)10/94] NOTE: The high beam indicator will not turn
on in the flash-to-pass mode during
nighttime driving.
*[IP34365( ALL)01/95] NOTE: You may notice that the lights flicker
when the vehicle is turned on or off.
This is a normal condition.
*[IP34367( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The Daytime Running Light (DRL) system
will not illuminate the tail lamps and
parking lamps. Turn on your headlamps
at dusk. Failure to do so may result in a
collision.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
103
%*[IP34370( ALL)01/95] Turning On the Exterior Lights
*[IP34550( BCGV)05/95] To turn on the headlamps, parking lamps, side
markers, and tail lamps, use the rotary knob that
is to the left of the steering wheel.
[IP35100( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010197-H
The knob that controls the headlamps and parking lamps
[IP35200( ALL)12/91] When you turn on the headlamps, the parking
lamps, tail lamps, and side markers
automatically turn on. But you can turn on the
parking lamps, tail lamps, and side markers
without turning on the headlamps.
*[IP36100( ALL)01/95] For more information about how the high beams
work, refer to the Steering Column Controls
chapter.
[IP36130( BCGV)05/95]
Chime for headlamps on
*[IP36160( BCGV)05/95] This chime sounds if the driver or any passenger
door is open when the parking lamps or
headlamps are on. The chime sounds until you
close the door, turn off the lamps or turn the
ignition to the ON position.
%*[IP36200( ALL)05/95] Cleaning the Exterior Lamps
*[IP36300( ALL)05/95] Do not use dry paper towel, chemical solvents
or abrasive cleaners to clean the lamps, as these
may cause scratches or crack the lamps.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
104
%*[IP36800( GV)01/95] Setting the Autolamp On/Off Delay
System
*[IP37100( BCGV)02/95] The autolamp sets the headlamps to turn on and
off automatically. You can use the autolamp to:
*[IP37300( BCGV)01/95] ❑turn on the lamps automatically at night
*[IP37400( BCGV)01/95] ❑turn off the lamps automatically during
daylight
*[IP37500( BCGV)01/95] ❑keep the lamps on for up to three minutes
after you turn the key to OFF.
[IP37800( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010198-F
The autolamp system on the left side of the instrument
panel
[IP38250( GV)05/95] To activate the autolamp feature, simply turn the
headlamp knob counterclockwise towards the
autolamp delay area. The autolamp
automatically turns the lamps on and off for
you.
*[IP39275( BCGV)01/95] Do not put any articles on top of the photocell
that is located in the top left corner of the
instrument panel. This photocell controls the
autolamp. If you cover it, the photocell reacts as
if it is nighttime, and the lamps turn on.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
105
[IP39401( GV)05/95] You can adjust the autolamp to keep the lamps
on after you leave your vehicle. The further you
move the headlamp knob to the left
(counterclockwise), the longer the lamps stay on.
*[IP39500( BCGV)12/92] You can set the autolamp so the lamps stay on
for up to three minutes after you turn your
vehicle off.
%*[IP44500( ALL)01/95] Lighting Up the Interior and Instrument
Panel
[IP45000( GV)05/95] With the parking lamps or headlamps
illuminated, you can brighten or dim the lights
in the instrument panel. To do this, locate the
switch above the headlight control knob and
press it up (to brighten the lights) or down (to
dim the lights). To turn the interior lights on
and off, push the headlamp knob in.
[IP45200( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0011308-B
The knob controls the light on the instrument panel and
the interior light (autolamp feature shown — other models
similar)
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
106
[IP45450( BCGV)07/93] Using the Automatic Illuminated Entry
System (If equipped)
[IP45650( GV)03/91] The interior lights will illuminate for
approximately 25 seconds when either front door
handle is lifted, any button on the keyless entry
pad is pressed, or the remote entry system
UNLOCK button is pushed. If the amount of
light outside your vehicle is below a
predetermined level, the exterior lights will also
illuminate.
[IP45900( BCGV)01/89] These lights automatically turn off after 25
seconds or when you turn the ignition key to
ON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off if
you have turned them on manually or if a door
is opened.
[IP46000( BCGV)01/89]
Tips on the illuminated entry system:
[IP46100( BCGV)01/89] ❑The illuminated entry timer will not turn off
the courtesy lamp if that lamp has been
turned on manually or by the door switch.
[IP46200( BCGV)01/89] ❑Occasionally, you will need to clean the lens
of the door lock assembly. Use Ford
Multi-Purpose Cleaner Concentrate, a mild
soap, or household ammonia and water
solution. Apply with a soft cloth or cotton
swab, followed by a clear water rinse.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
107
%*[IP46300( ALL)01/95] Turning on the Map and Reading Lamps
*[IP46425( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle has two map lamps for the
passenger and the driver. To turn on the map
lamps, push the switch next to each lamp.
[IP47000( GV)06/93]
one third page art:0010209-B
Front seat map and dome lamps
*[IP47010( ALL)01/95] The dual beam map lamps are located on each
side of the dome lamp. Each map lamp can be
turned on by the switches on the lamp.
%*[IP47270( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Interior Lamps
*[IP47290( ALL)04/95] Your interior dome lamps and map lamps are
plastic and should be cleaned with a mild
detergent diluted in water. Rinse them with clear
water.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
108
%*[IP47300( ALL)03/95] Clock
[IP47451( GV)05/94]
quarter page art:0011295-B
The digital clock
[IP47500( ALL)05/95] 1. To set the hour, press and hold the
H button. When the desired hour appears,
release the button.
[IP47600( ALL)05/95] 2. To set the minutes, press and hold the
M button. When the desired minute appears,
release the button.
%*[IP49400( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Instrument Panel Lens
*[IP49500( ALL)04/95] Clean the instrument panel lens with a soft cloth
and a glass cleaner, such as Ford Ultra-Clear
Spray Glass Cleaner, or equivalent. Do not use
paper towel or any abrasive cleaner to clean the
lens as these may cause scratches.
File:rcipv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:22:47 1996
109
Steering Column Controls
*[SC00200( ALL)01/95] The controls on the steering column and wheel
are designed to give you easy access to the
controls while you are driving.
%*[SC00300( ALL)01/95] The Turn Signal Lever
*[SC00400( ALL)01/95] You can use the turn signal lever on the left side
of the steering column to:
[SC00500( ALL)03/95] ❑operate the turn signals
*[SC00600( ALL)01/95] ❑turn the high beams on/off
*[SC00700( ALL)01/95] ❑flash the lights
*[SC00800( ALL)01/95] ❑turn the windshield wipers and washer
on/off
[SC00900( GV)06/94] ❑turn the cornering lamps on
[SC01900( ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0011292-A
The turn signal lever
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
110
%*[SC02100( ALL)01/95] Turn Signals
*[SC02201( ALL)03/95] Move the lever up to signal a right turn. Move
it down to signal a left turn. The corresponding
indicator light in the instrument cluster will
flash.
*[SC02301( ALL)03/95] If the turn signal stays on after you turn, move
the lever back to the center (off) position.
*[SC02401( ALL)03/95] For lane changes, move the lever far enough to
signal but not to latch. The lever will return to
the off position when you release it.
[SC02600( GV)07/93] If your vehicle is equipped with cornering
lamps, they will automatically light on either the
right or left side (depending on the direction of
the turn), when the headlamps are ON.
%*[SC02700( ALL)03/95] High Beams
*[SC02800( ALL)05/95] To turn on the high beams, turn the headlamp
control knob to the headlamp ON position and
push the turn signal lever away from you until
it latches. When the high beams are ON, the
high beam indicator light on the instrument
panel comes on.
*[SC02900( ALL)03/95] To turn off the high beams, pull the lever
toward you until it latches. The high beam
indicator light turns off.
%*[SC03200( ALL)05/95] Flashing the Lights
*[SC03300( ALL)05/95] To flash the headlamps, pull the lever toward
you for a moment and then release it. The
headlamps will flash whether the headlamp
knob is in the on or off position.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
111
%*[SC03500( ALL)03/95] Windshield Wipers and Washer
*[SC03600( ALL)03/95] To turn on the windshield wipers, the ignition
key must be turned to the ON or ACC position.
[SC03750( ALL)01/95] Rotate the end of the lever away from you to
activate the wipers. The first seven detents are
interval wipe positions, the eighth detent is the
LO position and the ninth detent is the HI
position.
*[SC03800( ALL)01/95] To turn the wipers off, turn the knob toward
you to the OFF position.
%*[SC04100( ALL)03/95] Variable Interval Wipers
*[SC04205( ALL)01/95] In addition to two speed wipers, your vehicle
has wipers that you can set to operate at
varying intervals. For example, you can set the
interval so they wipe less often when it drizzles
or more often in heavier rain.
[SC04700( ALL)02/95]
one third page art:0011293-A
The variable interval wiper on the turn signal lever
*[SC04900( ALL)03/94] To set the interval wipers, turn the knob at the
end of the turn signal lever toward or away
from you until the wipers are going at the
desired interval.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
112
*[SC05300( ALL)04/95] Windshield Washer
*[SC05401( ALL)01/95] To clean the windshield, push in the end of the
wiper knob. For a constant spray, keep the knob
pushed in. After you release the knob, the
wipers operate for two to three cycles before
turning off (if the wipers were OFF) or
returning to HI, LO, or the interval setting
selected.
*[SC05500( ALL)03/95] If the washer does not work, check the washer
fluid level and fill it if it is low. See the Servicing
Your Crown Victoria chapter. If there is enough
fluid, consult your nearest Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[SC05600( ALL)01/95] Do not try to clean the windshield when the
washer fluid container is empty or activate the
washers at any time for more than 15 seconds
continuously. This could damage the washer
pump system.
*[SC05700( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
In freezing weather, the washer solution
may freeze on the windshield and obscure
your vision. Always warm up the
windshield with the defroster before you
use the washer fluid. If you cannot see
through the windshield clearly, it can
increase the risk of being involved in a
collision.
*[SC05800( ALL)04/95] For information about refilling the washer fluid
or replacing your windshield wiper blades, see
Windshield washer fluid and Wipers in the Index.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
113
%*[SC05810( ALL)03/95] Hazard Flasher
[SC05820( ALL)05/95] To alert other drivers to hazardous situations,
push in the hazard flasher on the top of the
steering column. The same switch turns the
flashers off.
*[SC05830( ALL)03/95] The flashers work whether your vehicle is
running or not. The flashers work for up to two
hours when the battery is fully charged and in
good condition without draining the battery
excessively. If the flashers run for longer than
two hours or if the battery is not fully charged,
the battery can be drained.
[SC05860( BCGV)08/93]
one third page art:0010216-B
The control switch for the hazard flashers
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
114
%*[SC05900( ALL)01/95] Horn
*[SC06000( ALL)04/95] To sound the horn, push the center pad area of
the steering wheel.
[SC06900( GV)10/94]
half page art:0010086-F
The horn on the steering wheel
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
115
%*[SC07300( ALL)01/95] Tilt Steering
*[SC07400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never adjust the steering wheel when the
vehicle is moving.
[SC07850( GV)11/92]
half page art:0010459-D
The lever to tilt the steering wheel
*[SC08000( ALL)04/95] To change the position of the steering wheel,
pull the release lever on the column toward you.
Tip the steering wheel to the desired position.
Release the lever to lock the steering wheel in
place.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
116
%*[SC08600( ALL)03/91] Speed Control (If equipped)
*[SC08800( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has speed control, you can
automatically maintain a constant speed at or
above 30 mph (50 km/h).
*[SC08900( ALL)05/95] Use of radio transmitting equipment that is not
Federal Communications Commission (FCC) or
in Canada the Canadian Radio and
Telecommunications Commission (CRTC)
approved may cause the speed control to
malfunction. Therefore, use only properly
installed FCC (CRTC in Canada) approved radio
transmitting equipment in your vehicle.
[SC09150( BCGV)12/94] NOTE: When driving in hilly terrain, at high
elevations, or when pulling a trailer, it
may be desirable to drive with the
transmission in the Overdrive off
mode. This can be done by depressing
the Transmission Control Switch on
the transmission gear selection lever.
Driving in this mode prevents the
transmission from shifting excessively
when ascending grades, and helps
maintain speed when going down
steep hills.
*[SC09200( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Do not shift to N (Neutral) when using
the speed control. This will cause the
engine to overspeed.
[SC09250( ALL)12/94] When driving uphill, especially with a heavy
load, significant speed drops may occur. If the
speed drops more than 10 mph (16 km/h) the
automatic speed control will, by design, be
suspended. Some vehicles may require
temporary resumption of manual speed control
while ascending steep grades in order to
maintain the selected speed.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
117
[SC09900( GV)05/94]
half page art:0010096-D
The speed control switches on the steering wheel
*[SC10100( ALL)03/95] To set the speed control:
*[SC10300( ALL)03/95] 1. Press and release the ON switch.
*[SC10400( ALL)04/95] 2. Accelerate to the desired speed above
30 mph (50 km/h) using the accelerator
pedal.
*[SC10800( ALL)03/95] 3. Press the SET ACCEL switch and release it
immediately to set your speed. If you keep
this switch pressed, your speed will continue
to increase.
*[SC10900( ALL)03/95] 4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.
Your vehicle will maintain the speed you set.
*[SC11000( ALL)01/95] If you drive up or down a steep hill, your
vehicle may momentarily slow down or speed
up, even though the speed control is on. This is
normal.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
118
*[SC11030( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If your speed increases above your set
speed while driving in D (Drive) on a
downhill grade, you may want to
depress the Transmission Control
Switch located on the shift lever to
turn off overdrive to reduce vehicle
speed. Speed control cannot reduce the
vehicle speed if it goes above your set
speed on a downhill grade.
*[SC11100( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not use the speed control in heavy
traffic or on roads that are winding,
slippery, or unpaved.
%*[SC11200( ALL)03/95] Accelerating With the Speed Control
Operating
*[SC11300( ALL)03/95] You can use the accelerator pedal to speed up
momentarily. When you take your foot off the
accelerator, the vehicle will return to the set
speed.
%*[SC11400( ALL)01/95] Resetting the Speed Control
*[SC11450( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a lower speed, use
one of the following procedures:
[SC11500( ALL)05/94] ❑COAST — Press and hold the COAST switch.
Release the switch when the vehicle slows
down to the desired speed.
[SC11550( ALL)05/94] ❑Lightly tap the brake pedal. When the vehicle
attains the desired speed, press the SET
ACCEL switch and release it immediately.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
119
% [SC11600(M GV)05/95] ❑TAP-DOWN — Press and then quickly
release the COAST switch. Each time you
“tap” the switch, the set speed will decrease
by one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps
will cause the set speed to decrease in
increments of one (1) mph (1.6 km/h). For
example, if the current set speed is 60 mph
(96 km/h) five (5) taps of the COAST switch
will decrease the vehicle speed and SET it at
55 mph (88 km/h).
*[SC11650( ALL)04/95] If vehicle speed is reduced below 30 mph
(50 km/h) by any of the above methods, then
you must manually accelerate to a speed over
30 mph (50 km/h) and reset the system.
*[SC11700( ALL)03/95] To reset the speed control to a higher speed,
follow one of these procedures:
[SC11750( ALL)05/94] ❑ACCEL — Press and hold the SET ACCEL
switch. Release the switch when the vehicle
has accelerated to the desired speed.
[SC11800( ALL)05/94] ❑Depress the accelerator pedal. When the
vehicle attains the desired speed, press the
SET ACCEL switch and release it
immediately.
% [SC11850(M GV)05/95] ❑TAP-UP — Press and then quickly release the
SET ACCEL switch. Each time you “tap” the
switch, the set speed will increase by one (1)
mph (1.6 km/h). Multiple taps will cause the
set speed to increase in increments of one (1)
mph (1.6 km/h). For example, if the current
set speed is 55 mph (88 km/h) five (5) taps
of the SET ACCEL switch will increase the
vehicle speed and SET it at 60 mph
(96 km/h).
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
120
%*[SC12800( ALL)03/95] Cancelling and Resuming a Set Speed
[SC13000( BCGV)03/95] If you press the brake pedal, speed control is
suspended. You can return to the set speed by
pressing the RESUME switch, as long as you did
not press the OFF switch. You must be driving
at least 30 mph (48 km/h).
*[SC13400( ALL)03/95] Your vehicle will gradually return to the
previously set speed and then maintain it.
%*[SC13501( ALL)01/95] To Turn Speed Control Off
*[SC13601( ALL)04/95] Press the OFF switch.
*[SC13701( ALL)01/95] Speed control is also turned OFF each time the
vehicle ignition is shut off.
File:rcscv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:23:43 1996
121
Features
*[FV00300( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle has a variety of features designed
for your comfort, convenience and safety. Read
this chapter to find out about standard and
optional features.
%*[FV00400( ALL)01/95] Doors
%*[FV01105( GV)02/95] Childproof Locks for the Rear Doors
*[FV01110( GV)01/95] In addition to power locks, your vehicle has
childproof locks for the rear doors. If you set
these locks, the rear doors cannot be opened
from the inside of the vehicle. The doors can still
be opened from the outside when the lock knobs
are raised.
[FV01130( GV)11/90]
half page art:0010652-A
The childproof locks for the rear doors
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
122
*[FV01140( GV)03/95] To set the childproof lock on each rear door,
open the rear door.
[FV01160( GV)03/95] Find the lever inside the label with the word
LOCKED. Move the lever up.
*[FV01180( GV)03/95] To release the childproof lock, open the rear
door from the outside.
*[FV01195( GV)03/95] Move the lever down.
%*[FV01400( ALL)04/95] Power Door Locks (If equipped)
[FV01600( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle has power door locks, the
controls to lock the doors are on the trim panel
of the front door. When you close the doors
after you set the door locks, the doors remain
locked. If the power mechanism fails, the manual
door locks will override the power controls.
Pulling on a front inside door handle will
automatically override and release the front door
lock.
[FV02100( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0010224-D
The power locks on the driver’s door
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
123
%*[FV02600( BCGV)01/95] Using the Illuminated Entry System
(If equipped)
[FV03100( BCGV)05/95] The interior lights will illuminate for
approximately 25 seconds when either front door
handle is lifted, any button on the keyless entry
pad is pressed, or the remote entry system
UNLOCK button is pushed. If the amount of
light outside your vehicle is below a
predetermined level, the exterior lights will also
illuminate.
[FV03200( BCGV)02/95] These lights automatically turn off after 25
seconds or when you turn the ignition key to
ON or ACC. The inside lights will not turn off if
you have turned them on manually or if a door
is open.
%*[FV03598( BCGV)05/95] Using the Keyless Entry System
(If equipped)
[FV03600( BCGV)06/92] If your vehicle has the keyless entry system, you
can lock or unlock the vehicle doors and trunk
without using a key. The buttons for the system
are above the outside door handle on the
driver’s side.
[FV03850( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0010477-B
The keyless entry buttons
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
124
*[FV03900( BCGV)04/95] When you bought your vehicle, you were given
a computer code that operates the system for
your vehicle. For your convenience, we have
duplicated this code in three places.
*[FV04000( BCGV)02/95] The code is:
*[FV04100( BCGV)02/95] ❑on your owner’s wallet card found in the
glove compartment
[FV04400( BCGV)02/95] ❑taped to the underside of the trunk lid
[FV04800( GV)10/94] ❑taped to the computer module behind the
driver’s door trim panel.
[FV04925( BCGV)05/95] When you use this entry system, the illuminated
entry system turns on the interior lights for 25
seconds and the buttons on the keypad light up.
Do not push the buttons with a key, ballpoint
pen, pencil, or any other hard object. These
objects could damage the buttons.
%*[FV04950( BCGV)02/95]
Unlocking the doors with the keyless entry
system
[FV05000( BCGV)02/95] You must unlock the driver’s door before you
unlock any of the other doors or trunk. If you
let more than five seconds pass between pressing
numbers, the system shuts down, and you have
to enter the code again. The system has shut
down if the keypad light is out. If the keyless
entry system does not work properly, use the
key or transmitter(s) to lock and unlock the
doors or unlock the trunk.
*[FV05100( BCGV)02/95] 1. To unlock the driver’s door, enter the factory
code or your personal code. All codes have
five numbers. After you press the fifth
number, the driver’s door unlocks.
[FV05140( GV)03/92] 2. To unlock the passenger’s doors, press the
3/4 button within five seconds of unlocking
the driver’s door or trunk, or re-enter the
code to open the driver’s door, then press
3/4.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
125
*[FV05320( GV)01/95] 3. To unlock the trunk, press the 5/6 button
within five seconds of unlocking the driver’s
or passenger’s doors, or re-enter the code to
open the driver’s door, then press 5/6.
[FV05350( GV)06/93] As long as the driver’s door has been unlocked
first, you can open the passenger’s doors or the
trunk in any order.
*[FV05400( BCGV)02/95]
Locking the doors with the keyless entry
system
*[FV05500( BCGV)02/95] Along with unlocking your doors, you can use
the keyless entry system to lock the doors. You
can also use the Autolock feature to
automatically lock the doors after you get in the
vehicle.
[FV05600( BCGV)05/94] To lock all of the vehicle’s doors at the same
time, press 7/8 and 9/0 at the same time. It is
not necessary to first enter the keypad code.
% [FV05611( BCGV)02/95]
Autolock (With Keyless Entry if Equipped)
*[FV05621( BCGV)02/95] The Autolock feature will automatically lock all
the doors when:
[FV05631( BCGV)02/95] ❑the vehicle doors are fully closed
*[FV05641( BCGV)02/95] ❑the ignition key is turned to the ON position
[FV05650( BCGV)02/95] ❑someone is sitting in the driver’s seat or a
heavy object is placed on the seat, and
[FV05680( GV)10/94] ❑the vehicle is in any forward or reverse gear.
*[FV05701( BCGV)02/95] The Autolock feature will repeat when:
*[FV05750( BCGV)02/95] ❑the ignition key remains in the ON position
[FV05825( GV)10/94] ❑someone remains sitting in the driver’s seat
or a heavy object is on the seat,
*[FV05865( GV)08/94] ❑a door is opened and then closed, and
[FV05880( GV)10/94] ❑the vehicle is in any forward or reverse gear.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
126
*[FV05901( BCGV)02/95] If you do not want to use the Autolock feature,
it can be deactivated by using the buttons for
the keyless entry system.
[FV05950( BCGV)02/95] To deactivate the Autolock feature:
[FV06001( BCGV)02/95] 1. Enter your permanent five-digit entry code
(not the user code you may have set).
*[FV06051( BCGV)02/95] 2. Within 5 seconds, press and hold 7/8.
*[FV06101( BCGV)02/95] 3. Within 5 more seconds, press and release
3/4.
*[FV06200( BCGV)02/95] 4. Release 7/8.
*[FV06300( BCGV)02/95] To reactivate the Autolock feature, simply repeat
the instructions for deactivating the system. The
Autolock feature can be turned on and off using
the instructions above.
%*[FV06800( BCGV)02/95]
Programming your own entry code
*[FV06900( BCGV)01/95] You can program a personal code to unlock
your vehicle. This code does not replace the
permanent code that the dealership gave you.
Use your personal code in the same manner as
you would your original code.
*[FV07000( BCGV)02/95] To program your own code:
*[FV07050( BCGV)02/95] 1. Select five digits for your personal code.
[FV07100( BCGV)02/95] 2. Enter the permanent code that the dealership
gave you.
*[FV07200( BCGV)02/95] 3. Within five seconds, press 1/2.
*[FV07300( BCGV)02/95] 4. Within five seconds of pressing 1/2, enter
your personal code, pressing each digit
within five seconds of the previous digit.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
127
[FV07350( GV)10/94] 5. Five seconds after you press the fifth digit,
your door lock system will lock and unlock
the vehicle doors to confirm successful
programming.
*[FV07400( BCGV)02/95] The keyless entry system registers this
second code. To open your vehicle, you can
now use either code. The module remembers
only one personal code at a time. Entering a
second personal code will erase the first,
replacing it with the new second one.
*[FV07500( BCGV)02/95] To erase your personal code:
*[FV07600( BCGV)02/95] 1. Enter the original permanent code.
[FV07750( GV)10/94] 2. Press and release 1/2 within five seconds of
Step 1.
[FV07850( GV)10/94] 3. Press the 1/2 button a second time and hold
for two seconds.
*[FV07900( BCGV)02/95] The keyless entry system automatically
erases your personal code. The system will
now only respond to the permanent code.
*[FV07950( BCGV)02/95] Do not set a code that presents the numbers in
sequential order, such as 1/2, 3/4, 5/6, 7/8, 9/0.
Studies show that people who idly press the
buttons usually press a sequential pattern. Also,
do not select a code that uses the same button
five times. Thieves can easily figure out these
types of codes.
[FV07955( GV)10/94] Your door lock system will lock and unlock the
vehicle doors to confirm successful erasure. The
system will now only respond to the permanent
code.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
128
% [FV08007( GV)10/94]
Battery Saver
*[FV08012( GV)01/95] When the ignition is turned off, the vehicle will
turn off battery voltage to the vehicle lamps as
follows:
*[FV08016( GV)01/95] ❑Courtesy lights (lights which come on when a
door is opened): after 10 minutes.
[FV08020( GV)10/94] ❑Map/Glove compartment/Trunk/Hood
lamps: after 30 minutes.
[FV08023( GV)10/94] ❑Headlamps/Park lamps (only if headlamp
switch is left in Headlamp position): after 10
minutes.
*[FV08027( BCGV)02/95] This will prevent draining of the battery if those
lights have been left on inadvertently or if a
door is not completely closed. Battery voltage to
these lamps will be restored when the outside
front door handles are lifted, the keyless entry
keypad is used, the remote entry transmitter is
used, any door is opened, the trunk is opened,
or the ignition key is turned to the ON position.
%*[FV08030( ALL)02/95] Remote Entry System
(If equipped)
*[FV08036( ALL)03/94] If your vehicle has the remote entry system, you
can lock and unlock the vehicle doors and open
the trunk without using a key. The remote also
has a personal alarm feature. The buttons for the
system are located on the hand held
transmitter(s) that came with your vehicle.
*[FV08040( ALL)02/95] The system will work with up to four
transmitters. Your vehicle came with two
transmitters. Additional transmitters can be
ordered from your dealer.
[FV08047( GV)10/94] The remote entry features only operate with the
transmission in P (Park) or N (Neutral).
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
129
[FV08053( GV)03/94]
one third page art:0011287-A
Remote entry transmitter
%*[FV08055( ALL)02/95]
Unlocking the doors and opening the trunk
*[FV08060( ALL)02/95] To unlock the driver’s door, press the UNLOCK
button.
*[FV08065( ALL)02/95] To unlock the other doors, press the UNLOCK
button a second time within five seconds of
unlocking the driver’s door.
[FV08075( GV)05/95] To open the trunk, press the TRUNK button
twice within five seconds.
*[FV08080( ALL)02/95]
Locking the doors
*[FV08085( ALL)02/95] To lock all the doors, press the LOCK button.
[FV08093( GV)10/94] The doors will lock and the horn will chirp to
indicate the vehicle is locked.
*[FV08096( GV)01/95] The door lock Horn Chirp is a programmable
feature. To deactivate the Horn Chirp feature:
*[FV08099( GV)01/95] 1. Enter your permanent five-digit code (not
the user code you may have set).
[FV08102( GV)10/94] 2. Within five seconds, press and hold 7/8.
[FV08106( GV)10/94] 3. Within five more seconds, press and release
1/2.
*[FV08108( GV)02/95] 4. Release 7/8.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
130
[FV08111( GV)10/94] To reactivate the Horn Chirp feature, simply
repeat the instructions for deactivating the
feature.
*[FV08114( ALL)02/95]
Activating the remote personal alarm
*[FV08120( ALL)02/95] If you wish to activate the remote personal
alarm, press the PANIC button. This will honk
the horn and flash the low beam headlamps and
tail lamps for approximately two minutes and
forty-five seconds. You can turn it OFF by
pressing the PANIC button again or by turning
the ignition key to the RUN position.
[FV08125( ALL)05/94] When you use the remote entry UNLOCK,
TRUNK or PANIC buttons, the illuminated entry
system turns on the interior lights for 25
seconds. You can turn these lights off with the
LOCK button or by turning the ignition to the
RUN position. The interior lights will not turn
off if you have turned them on manually or if a
door is open.
%*[FV08725( ALL)02/95]
Replacing the batteries
*[FV08760( GV)01/95] The remote entry transmitter is powered by two
coin type three-volt lithium 1616
batteries (included) that should last for several
years of normal use. If you notice a significant
decrease in operating range, the batteries should
be replaced. Replacement batteries can be
purchased at most pharmacies, watch stores or
at your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[FV08775( ALL)02/95] NOTE: The operating range of the remote
entry system can also be affected by
weather conditions (such as very cold
temperatures) or structures around the
vehicle (buildings, other vehicles, radio
and TV towers, etc.). Typical operating
range will allow you to be up to 33
feet (10 meters) away from your
vehicle.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
131
%*[FV08850( ALL)02/95]
Replacement/additional transmitters
*[FV08880( GV)01/95] In the event a transmitter is lost, a new one may
be purchased from your dealer.
*[FV08885( GV)09/94] To program replacement or additional
transmitters you must have all the transmitters
intended for use on your vehicle.
*[FV08890( GV)09/94] Initiating the following procedure erases all prior
programmed transmitters, thus ALL must be
reprogrammed at the same time.
*[FV08895( GV)01/95] 1. Enter the factory keyless entry code. Your
personal code will not allow programming.
*[FV08901( GV)01/95] 2. Press the 1/2 button.
*[FV08905( GV)01/95] 3. Press one button on each of the transmitters
to be programmed. Each transmitter button
must be pressed within seven (7) seconds of
the prior one. Each time a transmitter is
successfully programmed, all of the vehicle
doors will lock and then unlock to verify
programming. If the doors did not
lock/unlock, your transmitter was not
programmed.
*[FV08910( GV)01/95] Additional transmitters may be purchased from
your dealer (remote entry system will work with
up to four transmitters). Follow the same
programming procedure as above.
*[FV08925( ALL)02/95] THIS DEVICE COMPLIES WITH PART 15 OF
THE FCC RULES. OPERATION IS SUBJECT
TO THE FOLLOWING TWO CONDITIONS:
(1) THIS DEVICE MAY NOT CAUSE
HARMFUL INTERFERENCE, AND (2) THIS
DEVICE MUST ACCEPT ANY
INTERFERENCE RECEIVED, INCLUDING
INTERFERENCE THAT MAY CAUSE
UNDESIRED OPERATION.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
132
*[FV08930( GV)01/95] NOTE: All transmitters to be used on your
vehicle must be programmed/
reprogrammed at the same time.
%*[FV08950( ALL)02/95] Windows
%*[FV08980( BCGV)02/95] Using the Power Windows
*[FV09000( GV)02/95] Each door has a power control that opens and
closes the window on that door. The driver’s
door has a master control panel that operates all
four windows.
*[FV09050( ALL)01/95] Power windows can only be opened or closed
when the ignition switch is in the ON or ACC
position.
*[FV09075(MBCGV )05/95] RWARNING
Do not let children play with the power
windows. They may seriously hurt
themselves. Make sure occupants are clear
of the window(s) before closing.
[FV09300( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0010234-D
The master controls on the driver’s door
*[FV09400(M GV)05/95] To lock out all window switches except the
master controls, press the window lock switch
once. To restore control to the individual
windows, press the switch again.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
133
%*[FV09500(M GV)05/95] There is also an Express Down feature on the
driver’s power window.
[FV09600(M GV)05/95] To operate, actuate driver’s power window
switch to the down position for less than 0.4
seconds; the window will then open
automatically. To terminate automatic operation
before the window completely opens, operate the
switch again, for less than 0.4 seconds, to either
the up or down position. Actuating the switch
for greater than 0.4 seconds provides
conventional power window operation. Closing
of the power window is conventional operation
only.
%*[FV15700( ALL)01/95] Seats
%*[FV15710( ALL)04/95] Head Restraints
*[FV15720( ALL)04/95] If you use them properly, head restraints will
help protect your head and neck in a collision.
*[FV15730( ALL)05/95] A head restraint helps protect you best if you
position it behind your head and not behind
your neck.
*[FV15740( ALL)02/95]
Standard head restraints
*[FV15750( ALL)01/95] You can adjust the head restraints for your
comfort and protection.
[FV15770( ALL)05/92]
one third page art:0010048-C
Adjusting the head restraint
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
134
% [FV15850( GV)03/94] Adjusting the Front Passenger Seat
Manually
*[FV16000( ALL)02/89] In the front seats, you can move the whole seat
forward or backward or tilt the back of the seat
forward or backward.
*[FV16150( GV)01/95] To move the seat forward or backward:
[FV16200( BCGV)04/95] 1. Find the adjustment bar underneath the front
part of the seat.
[FV16400( BCGV)04/95] 2. Lift the bar to unlatch the seat.
*[FV16600( ALL)04/95] 3. Move the seat to the desired position.
[FV16700( BCGV)04/95] 4. Release the bar to latch the seat in its new
position. Make sure the seat locks securely in
place.
[FV17050( GV)05/92]
one third page art:0010173-B
The front seat adjustment bar
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
135
[FV17150( GV)05/92] To recline the front seat:
*[FV17200( ALL)01/95] 1. On the side of the seat, find the handle for
the recliner.
*[FV17300( ALL)04/95] 2. Lift the handle up and hold it in place.
*[FV17400( ALL)01/95] 3. Lean against the back of the seat and adjust
it to the position you want. You can tilt the
seat back or bring it forward.
*[FV17500( ALL)04/95] 4. Release the handle to lock the seat in its new
position.
*[FV17600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never adjust the driver’s seat or seatback
when the vehicle is moving.
*[FV17700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To reduce the risk of serious injury in a
collision, always drive and ride with your
seatback upright and the lap belt snug
and low across the hips.
[FV17800( GV)03/94]
one third page art:0010254-B
The seatback recliner handle
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
136
%*[FV18500( BCGV)05/95] Using the Power Seats (If equipped)
[FV18700( GV)10/94] If your vehicle has power seats, you can adjust
them in several directions. The controls are
located on the driver and passenger door trim
panels or on the side of the driver’s seat.
[FV18810( GV)10/94]
one third page art:0011313-A
The power seat controls on the driver’s seat — Base models
[FV18825( V)03/94]
one third page art:0010259-B
The power seat controls on the driver’s door trim panel
*[FV18850( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not pile cargo higher than the
seatbacks to avoid injuring people in a
collision or sudden stop.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
137
% [FV18920( GV)10/90] Power Seat Recliner/Lumbar Option
[FV18960( GV)10/90] The arrows on the power seat control panel
indicate the direction the seat or seatback will
move. To adjust the seat or seatback move the
control knob in the desired direction.
[FV18980( GV)03/94] The power lumbar switch controls the inflation
of the lumbar support pad in the seatback. To
inflate the lumbar pad, push the forward portion
of the switch. To deflate the pad, press the rear
portion of the switch.
[FV18990( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010686-B
The power lumbar switch
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
138
%*[FV19000( V)05/95] Programmable Memory — Seat and
Mirrors (If equipped)
*[FV19025( V)01/95] If your vehicle is equipped with this option, you
can store settings for three seat and mirror
positions. This allows you to get into your
vehicle and simply push the preset button(s) to
automatically have your seat and mirrors in the
proper position.
[FV19050( V)03/94]
one third page art:0011290-A
Setting the programmable memory seat switch
[FV19075( V)06/94] 1. Adjust your seat to the desired position.
[FV19100( V)06/94] 2. Press the “SET” button. A small lamp inside
the button will light up. This tells you that
you have five seconds to program your seat
position.
[FV19125( V)06/94] 3. Press “1” button within five (5) seconds. You
now have set in memory the first seat
position. Set the second seat position by
adjusting the seat, pressing the SET button
and pushing the “2” button within five (5)
seconds. A third seat position can be set in
the same manner as above by pushing “1”
and “2” buttons simultaneously.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
139
[FV19150( V)02/93] To prevent accidental seat movement, this
system will only recall a position when the
transmission gearshift lever is in P (Park) or
N (Neutral) with the engine either running or
off. However, a new position can be set at any
time. If the memory seat has been activated and
you wish to stop the seat movement, push the
switch again.
[FV19175( V)06/94] Moving the seat with the power controls is
possible even when memory seat positions have
been set. The seat will not automatically
reposition until the memory position is activated
by pushing the appropriate button(s).
%*[FV20500( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Seats
*[FV20600( ALL)05/95]
Leather and vinyl
*[FV20650( ALL)05/95] For routine cleaning, wipe the surface with a
soft, damp cloth. For more thorough cleaning,
wipe the surface with a leather and vinyl cleaner
or a mild soap.
%*[FV20700( ALL)04/95]
Fabric
*[FV20750( ALL)04/95] Remove dust and loose dirt with a whisk broom
or a vacuum cleaner. Remove fresh spots
immediately. Follow the directions that come
with the cleaner.
*[FV20775( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before using any cleaner, test it on a
small, hidden area of fabric. If the
fabric’s color or texture is adversely
affected by a particular cleaner, do not
use it.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
140
%*[FV20800( ALL)01/95] Mirrors
*[FV20850(ALL )03/95] You can adjust your rearview mirror in any
direction. The special swivel bracket lets you
move the mirror up or down and from side to
side.
[FV021000(ALL )03/95] RWARNING
Make sure you can see clearly through the
rearview mirror at all times. Do not block
your vision. If you cannot see through the
mirror, it could result in a collision,
injuring yourself and others.
%*[FV21500( GV)01/95] Automatic Dimming Inside Rearview
Mirror (If equipped)
[FV22620( GV)10/94]
quarter page art:0010037-C
The automatic non-glare mirror
*[FV22630( GV)01/95] The electronic day/night mirror will change
from the normal state to the non-glare state
when bright lights (glare) reach the mirror. This
mirror functions at night, and has a limited
function at dusk or dawn. From the non-glare
state, the mirror will return to the normal state
after a short delay. The delay starts when the
glare goes away. The delay prevents excessive
changing of the mirror as traffic moves behind
and around the vehicle, or on rolling hills and
curves.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
141
[FV22650( GV)10/94] To turn the mirror on, push the ON/OFF
switch, located on the bottom of the mirror, to
latch it in the ON position. The switch will
illuminate and the mirror will be in the
automatic dimming mode. To turn the switch
illumination and automatic dimming feature off,
push the ON/OFF switch again.
*[FV22660( GV)01/95] The electronic mirror measures the brightness of
the light coming in from the rear of the vehicle.
It automatically makes a correction in the glare
state. The mirror may be turned off in either the
normal or non-glare position.
[FV22685( GV)03/95] There are two light sensors (photocells) in this
mirror. The sensor that detects rear glare is
located inside a window in the center of the
mirror. The second light sensor which
determines outside light level is located on the
backside of the mirror case.
*[FV22690( GV)01/95] One important safety feature is that the mirror
automatically returns to the normal position
whenever the vehicle is placed in R (Reverse)
(when the mirror is in the ON position). This
feature ensures a bright clear view in the mirror
when backing up.
% [FV24100( BCGV)07/93] Adjusting the Dual Electric Remote
Control Mirrors
[FV24150( GV)11/90] Your vehicle is equipped with electric remote
control side view mirrors; the switch for
controlling their operation is a control knob in
the armrest.
%*[FV24400( ALL)01/95] Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror
with harsh abrasives, fuel or other
petroleum-based cleaning products.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
142
[FV24450( GV)03/94]
one third page art:0010273-C
The mirror controls on the driver’s left armrest
*[FV24700( ALL)04/95] To adjust the side mirrors:
*[FV24800( ALL)01/95] 1. Find the control switch in the driver’s door
panel.
*[FV24900( ALL)02/95] 2. Select the right or left mirror by moving the
selector switch to R or L.
[FV25000( ALL)06/93] 3. Move the knob in the direction of the arrows
for the direction you want to move the
mirror.
*[FV25100( ALL)01/95] 4. Return the selector switch to the middle
position to keep the mirror in place.
%*[FV25200( GV)03/95] Heated Mirror Feature
*[FV25300( GV)03/95] Both mirrors are heated whenever the Electric
Rear Window Defroster is turned on. Do not
remove ice from the mirrors with a scraper or
you could damage them. If the outside mirror
glass is frozen in place, do not attempt to
readjust or move the mirror glass or damage
may result.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
143
[FV28700( ALL)01/89] The Right Side Convex Mirror
[FV28800( ALL)03/90] The side view mirror on the right is a convex
mirror. This mirror gives you a wider view of
the lanes on your right and behind you.
*[FV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The side view mirror on the right makes
objects appear smaller and farther away
than they actually are.
%*[FV28950( ALL)01/95] Sun Visors
%*[FV29100( ALL)05/94] Turning on the Mirror Light on the Sun
Visors (If equipped)
[FV29300( ALL)06/93] To turn on the visor mirror light, lift the mirror
cover.
[FV29900( GV)10/90]
one third page art:0010278-B
The mirror on the sun visor
%*[FV32626( GV)03/95] Ashtray and Cupholder
[FV32650( GV)10/94] Your vehicle is equipped with an
ashtray/cupholder mounted to the lower center
of the instrument panel.
*[FV32675( GV)01/95] To open the ashtray, pull out the bottom edge of
the drawer until it stops.
*[FV32701( GV)01/95] To close, remove cup(s) and push drawer
forward until closed.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
144
%*[FV32725(M GV)03/95] Power Point Electrical Outlet
[FV32760( GV)03/95] The power point outlet is located on the
instrument panel to the right of the ashtray. This
outlet should be used for optional electrical
accessories.
[FV32785( GV)05/95] NOTE: Do not attempt to plug the cigarette
lighter into the power point outlet.
Damage could occur. Do not plug
optional electrical accessories into the
cigarette lighter. Electrical system
damage could occur.
[FV32815( GV)05/95]
half page art:0011352-A
Power point electrical outlet
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
145
%*[FV32875( ALL)01/95] Storage Compartments
*[FV32900(M GV)01/95] Your vehicle may have several small storage
compartments:
[FV33000( BCGV)11/94] ❑a glove compartment that locks. Use the
round key to lock and unlock it.
*[FV33100( BCGV)01/95] ❑two map pockets on the panels of the front
doors.
[FV33200( V)03/93] ❑two map pockets on the back of the front
seats (on LX only).
*[FV33300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not put objects on the ledge between
the back seat and the rear window, as
they can become dangerous projectiles and
injure someone.
%*[FV33400( ALL)01/95] Trunk
*[FV33500( ALL)01/95] Opening the Trunk Manually
[FV34200( GV)05/94] The trunk in your vehicle gives you plenty of
room for storage — 20.6 cubic feet (.58 cubic
meters).
%*[FV34600( ALL)03/95] To open and close the trunk from the outside:
[FV34950( BCGV)03/95] 1. Insert the key into the lock on the trunk.
[FV35100( ALL)11/90] 2. Turn the key to the right until the trunk
opens.
[FV35300( ALL)11/90] 3. Remove the key before you close and lock
the lid.
[FV35450( ALL)06/93] 4. Shut the trunk lid completely.
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
146
% [FV36200( ALL)03/95] Using the Remote Control for the
Trunk (If equipped)
[FV36550( GV)12/91] You can use the remote control on the driver’s
door to unlock and open the trunk unless you
lock the button with the main key. The valet key
equipped with your vehicle can only open the
doors and start the engine.
[FV36800( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010670-C
The remote control for the trunk
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
147
% [FV47500( ALL)08/93] Positive Location Floor Mat
[FV47700( GV)06/93] When installing or removing the driver’s side
floor mat you must attach/detach the positive
location grommet from the hook on the floor.
The hook is just forward of the center of the
driver’s seat. This is done by rotating the
grommet one quarter turn, slipping the eyelet
onto the hook, and sliding it to the floor.
[FV47900( GV)03/94]
half page art:0001094-B
The positive location floor mat hook
File:rcfvv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:27:22 1996
149
Electronic Sound Systems
% [AS10315( GV)05/94]
full page art:0060663-A
Luxury Audio System (Analog)
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
150
[AS10317( V)07/94]
full page art:0060664-B
Luxury Audio System (Digital, with factory-installed CD
Changer)
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
151
*[AS10319( GV)03/95] Luxury Audio System
*[AS10320( GV)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS10330( GV)04/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
*[AS10340( GV)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the
radio on. Press again to turn it off.
*[AS10351( GV)04/95]
How to adjust the volume
*[AS10352( GV)05/95] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to the right to
increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume.
[AS10353( V)04/94] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off (with the
“VOL/PUSH ON” button), the volume
will remain in the position it was set
at when radio power is switched back
on (digital systems only).
*[AS10354( GV)04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS10355( GV)04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
frequency band. Pushing the “AM/FM” button
causes the frequency band to switch from “AM”
to “FM1” to “FM2” to “AM”, changing one band
to the next each time the button is pressed.
These functions are used with the station
memory buttons described under How to tune
radio stations.
%*[AS10356( GV)05/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS10357( GV)01/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a
particular station. You can use the “TUNE”,
“SEEK”, “SCAN” or memory buttons.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
152
*[AS10358( GV)05/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function
[AS10359( GV)03/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time by pressing and
releasing either the left bor right aside of
the “TUNE” button. To change frequencies
quickly, press and hold down either the right
or left side of the “TUNE” button.
*[AS10360( GV)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS10361( GV)04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS10362( GV)03/95] Press the right aside of the “SEEK” button
to select the next listenable station up the
frequency band. Press the left bside of the
button to select the next listenable station
down the frequency band. By holding the
button down, listenable stations can be
passed over to reach the desired station.
*[AS10363( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function
*[AS10364( GV)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the
scan mode up the frequency band, stopping
on each listenable station for approximately
five seconds.
*[AS10365( GV)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled station, press the “SCAN” button
again.
*[AS10366( GV)01/95] ❑Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons
*[AS10367( GV)01/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2)
[AS10368( GV)05/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
to the desired frequencies:
*[AS10369( GV)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
153
*[AS10370( GV)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold
the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS10371( GV)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
*[AS10372( GV)01/95]
Using the Automatic Memory Store feature
(“AUTOSET”)
*[AS10373( GV)01/95] If the memory buttons have been set, either by
using the Auto Memory Load feature or if you
have set them manually, the system is prepared
to let you use a convenient feature called
Automatic Memory Store.
*[AS10374( GV)01/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually
set strong stations into your memory buttons
without losing your originally set stations. Your
radio will automatically set your memory
buttons to the strong local stations.
*[AS10375( GV)01/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the
“AUTOSET” button once. Your radio will set the
first six strong stations of the band you are in
(AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons.
The display will flash “AUTO” and display the
autoset icon “A” while the stations are being set
in the memory buttons.
*[AS10376( GV)01/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than six strong
stations in the frequency band, the
remaining unfilled buttons will store
the last strong station detected on the
band. After all stations have been
filled, the radio will begin playing the
station stored on memory button 1.
*[AS10377( GV)01/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and
return to the manually-set memory button
stations, simply push the “AUTOSET” button.
Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”. The
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
154
next time Auto Memory Store is activated on
that band, the radio will store the next set of six
strong stations.
*[AS10378( GV)01/95]
Adjusting the tone balance of your radio
*[AS10379( GV)01/95] ❑Increasing or decreasing bass and treble
response
*[AS10380( GV)01/95] Push the “BASS/TREB” popout knob to gain
access to the bass and treble controls. Bass
control allows you to adjust the lower, bass
frequencies to your preference. The outer ring
of the “BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the bass
(turn clockwise to increase bass;
counterclockwise to decrease bass).
*[AS10381( GV)01/95] Treble control allows you to adjust the
higher, treble frequencies of your radio to
your preference. The inner ring of the
“BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the treble (turn
clockwise to increase treble; counterclockwise
to decrease treble).
*[AS10382( GV)01/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance and speaker fader
*[AS10383( GV)01/95] Push the “BAL/FADE” popout knob to gain
access to the speaker balance and fader
controls. Balance control allows you to adjust
the sound distribution between the right and
left speakers. The outer ring of “BAL/FADE”
knob adjusts the speaker balance control.
(Turn clockwise to shift the sound to the
right speakers, and turn counterclockwise to
shift the sound to the left speakers.)
*[AS10384( GV)01/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. The inner ring of the “BAL/FADE”
knob adjusts the speaker fader. (Turn
clockwise to shift the sound to the rear
speakers, and turn counterclockwise to shift
the sound to the front speakers.)
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
155
*[AS10385( V)07/94] Using the Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
Feature
*[AS10386( V)03/95] Push the “DSP” button to activate the feature.
The display will indicate which signal mode is
in effect. To change the signal mode press either
the left bor right aside of the selector button
(located under the “DSP” button).
*[AS10387( V)07/94] The following signal modes may be selected:
*[AS10388( V)07/94] 1. “HALL” — Rectangular concert hall capacity
of about 2,000.
*[AS10389( V)07/94] 2. “CHURCH” — Church with a high vault.
*[AS10390( V)07/94] 3. “JAZZ” — Jazz club with clearly reflected
sounds.
*[AS10391( V)07/94] 4. “STADIUM” — Outdoor stadium with a
capacity of about 30,000.
*[AS10392( V)07/94] 5. “NEWS” — “Voice-only” type of sound with
a limited audio band.
*[AS10393( V)07/94] To deactivate the DSP feature, press the “DSP”
button again.
%*[AS10394( GV)01/95] Your Antenna
*[AS10395( GV)03/95] Antennas for both AM and FM reception are
hidden in the back glass of your vehicle. There
is an internal antenna module that will switch
between AM and FM, when bands are changed,
for maximum reception performance.
*[AS10396( GV)01/95] NOTE: Do not attempt to adapt any other type
of antenna system to your audio
system.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
156
*[AS10397( GV)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
*[AS10398( GV)02/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
cassette tape player.
*[AS10399( GV)02/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS10400( GV)04/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with
power loading. Once you insert a tape and push
slightly (with the open edge to the right), the
loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of
the way in and play will begin after a
momentary tape tightening process. Display
indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing.
*[AS10401( GV)01/95] If the player is in the tape mode but not in play,
pressing the “TAPE” button will activate play. If
the “TAPE” button is pressed with no tape
inserted, the display will flash “NO TAPE”.
*[AS10402( GV)02/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
*[AS10403( GV)01/95] There are six ways to quickly locate a desired
selection on the tape. You can use the fast
forward, rewind, Blank Skip, “SEEK”, “SCAN”
or “SIDE 1-2” functions. Following are brief
descriptions of each:
*[AS10404( GV)02/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape
*[AS10405( GV)03/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”
button. The radio will play while the tape is
in fast forward. The light above the “FF”
button will blink while in the fast forward
mode. Press “FF” again or press the “TAPE”
button to stop fast forwarding. At the end of
the tape, the direction automatically reverses
and plays the other side of the tape.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
157
*[AS10406( GV)02/95] ❑Rewinding the tape
*[AS10407( GV)03/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.
The radio will automatically begin playing
while the tape is rewinding. The light above
the “REW” button will blink while in the
rewind mode. Press “REW” again or press
the “TAPE” button to stop rewinding.
*[AS10408( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette
tape player
*[AS10409( GV)03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right a
side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to
the next selection on the tape. Push the left
bside to restart a currently playing tape
selection.
*[AS10410( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “Blank Skip” function with your
cassette tape player
*[AS10415( GV)01/95] Press the “Blank Skip” button to activate the
blank skip mode. After approximately 20
seconds of blank program, the tape will seek
forward to the next program.
*[AS10420( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with your
cassette tape player
*[AS10425( GV)01/95] Pushing the “SCAN” button will begin the
forward scan mode on the tape currently
playing, stopping on each tape selection for
approximately eight seconds.
*[AS10430( GV)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled tape selection, press the “SCAN”
button or the “TAPE” button.
*[AS10435( GV)02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape being
played
*[AS10440( GV)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected
by pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
158
*[AS10445( GV)02/95]
How to eject the tape
*[AS10450( GV)03/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
“EJECT” button. The tape will eject only when
in the tape mode. The cassette cannot be ejected
when the radio is playing an “AM” or “FM”
station. The system will revert to radio mode
when the cassette is ejected.
*[AS10455( GV)02/95]
Using the DolbyHB noise reduction feature
*[AS10460( GV)01/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
*[AS10465( GV)03/95] Push the kbutton to activate. When
activated, the light above the kbutton will be
illuminated.
*[AS10470( GV)01/95]
Tape error messages
*[AS10475( GV)01/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped to
diagnose certain problems you may experience.
Error codes are as follows:
*[AS10480( GV)01/95] TD E1 — Radio tries to change sides of tape 3
times in a 10 second span. Push “EJECT” and
try another tape. If problem persists, refer
problem to qualified personnel for service.
*[AS10485( GV)01/95] TD E2 — Tape eject failure. Radio tries to eject
tape and it will not eject. Push “EJECT” to eject
tape. If the tape will not eject, refer problem to
qualified personnel for service.
*[AS10490( GV)01/95] TD E3 — Loading error. Push “EJECT” to eject
tape. Reload tape. If the same error code appears
in the display, try another tape.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
159
*[AS10491( GV)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and
Tapes
*[AS10492( GV)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player
performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS10493( GV)02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to
clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS10494( GV)02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*[AS10495( GV)02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to direct
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS10496( GV)02/95] ❑If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it
before playing by putting your finger or a
pencil into one of the holes and turning the
hub until the tape is tight.
*[AS10497( GV)02/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can become
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting a cassette.
*[AS10498( GV)03/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape
player when not in use. High heat in the
vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
160
[AS56100( V)05/94]
full page art:0060666-A
Midline Stereo Radio
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
161
% [AS56200( GV)05/94]
full page art:0060667-A
Midline Stereo Cassette
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
162
*[AS56220( V)05/95] Midline Stereo and Stereo
Cassette Radio
*[AS56250( GV)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS56300( GV)04/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
*[AS56350( GV)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the
radio on. Press again to turn it off.
*[AS56400( GV)04/95]
How to adjust the volume
*[AS56450( GV)04/94] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to the right to
increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume. Bars illuminate in the display to
show relative volume level.
*[AS56460( GV)04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off (with the
“POWER” button), the volume will
remain in the position it was set at
when radio power is switched back on.
*[AS56500( GV)04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS56550( GV)02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape
(when in cassette mode). Pushing the button
more than once will alternate between AM, FM1
and FM2. These functions are used with the
station memory buttons described under How to
tune radio stations.
%*[AS56600( GV)05/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS56650( GV)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a
particular station. You can manually locate the
station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,
“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
163
select the station by using the memory buttons,
which you can set to any desired frequency.
These four methods are described below.
*[AS56660( GV)05/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function
*[AS56700( GV)03/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time by pressing and
releasing either the left (b) or right (a) side
of the “TUNE” button.
*[AS56750( GV)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS56800( GV)04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS56850( GV)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to
automatically select listenable stations up or
down the frequency band. Press the right
(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the
next listenable station up the frequency band.
Press the left (b) side of the button to select
the next listenable station down the
frequency band. By holding the button down,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach
the desired station.
*[AS56900( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function
*[AS56950( GV)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the
scan mode up the frequency band, stopping
on each listenable station for approximately
five seconds.
*[AS57000( GV)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled station, press the “SCAN” button
again.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
164
*[AS57050( GV)04/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons
*[AS57100( GV)02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
*[AS57150( GV)02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
to the desired frequencies:
*[AS57200( GV)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS57300( GV)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold
the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS57350( GV)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
[AS57375( GV)05/94] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
the station memory preset buttons will
need to be reset.
*[AS57400( GV)02/95]
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
output of your radio
*[AS57450( GV)04/95] ❑Increasing or decreasing bass response
*[AS57500( GV)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “BASS” button to
increase bass; press the bottom (d) of the
“BASS” button to decrease bass.
*[AS57550( GV)04/95] ❑Increasing or decreasing treble response
*[AS57600( GV)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “TREBLE” button to
increase treble; press the bottom (d) of the
treble button to decrease treble.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
165
*[AS57650( GV)04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance
*[AS57700( GV)03/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the
sound distribution between the right and left
speakers. Press the top (c) of the “BAL”
button to shift the sound to the right
speakers, and press the bottom (d) of the
“BAL” button to shift the sound to the left
speakers.
*[AS57750( GV)04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader
*[AS57800( GV)03/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. Press the top (c) of the “FADE”
button to shift the sound to the front
speakers, and press the bottom (d) of the
“FADE” button to shift the sound to the back
speakers.
*[AS57850( GV)04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show
relative levels of bass and treble, and
positions of speaker balance and fader
functions (left to right, front to rear).
*[AS57900( GV)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
*[AS57950( GV)04/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
cassette tape player or eject a tape.
*[AS58000( GV)02/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS58050( GV)09/94] Your cassette tape player is equipped with
power loading. Once you insert a tape and push
slightly (with the open edge to the right), the
loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of
the way in and play will begin after a
momentary tape tightening process.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
166
[AS58150( GV)04/94] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the
ignition on whether or not the radio
power is on. Inserting a cassette tape
with the radio power off will turn the
audio system on. After the cassette is
ejected, radio play will return.
*[AS58200( GV)02/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
*[AS58250( GV)09/94] There are four ways to quickly locate a desired
selection on the tape. You can use the fast
forward, rewind, “SEEK”, or “SCAN” function.
Following are brief descriptions of each.
*[AS58300( GV)02/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape
*[AS58350( GV)01/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”
button. The radio will begin playing until fast
forward is manually stopped (by pushing the
“TAPE” button) or the end of the tape is
reached.
*[AS58400( GV)01/95] At the end of the tape, the direction
automatically reverses and plays the other
side of the tape.
*[AS58450( GV)02/95] ❑Rewinding the tape
*[AS58500( GV)01/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.
The radio will begin playing until rewind is
manually stopped (by pushing the “TAPE”
button) or the beginning of the tape is
reached.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
167
*[AS58550( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette
tape player
*[AS58600( GV)03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a)
side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to
the next selection on the tape. Push the left
(b) side to seek the previous tape selection.
*[AS58650( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with your
cassette tape player
*[AS58700( GV)01/95] Press the “SCAN” button to begin the
forward scan mode on the tape currently
playing, stopping on each tape selection for
approximately an eight-second sampling
(display indicates “SC”).
*[AS58800( GV)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled tape selection, press “SCAN” a
second time.
*[AS58850( GV)02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape being
played
*[AS58900( GV)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected
by pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.
*[AS58950( GV)02/95]
How to eject the tape
*[AS59000( GV)01/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
“EJ” button. The radio will resume playing if the
radio power is on. The tape cartridge can be
ejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on or
off.
*[AS59050( GV)01/95]
How to store the tape
*[AS59100( GV)01/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape
player and resume radio play.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
168
*[AS59150( GV)02/95]
Using the DolbyHB noise reduction feature
*[AS59200( GV)02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
*[AS59250( GV)04/95] Push the kbutton to activate Dolby B Noise
Reduction. Push again to deactivate.
*[AS59860( GV)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and
Tapes
*[AS59870( GV)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player
performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS59880( GV)02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to
clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS59890( GV)02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*[AS59900( GV)02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to direct
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS59910( GV)02/95] ❑If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it
before playing by putting your finger or a
pencil into one of the holes and turning the
hub until the tape is tight.
*[AS59920( GV)01/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can become
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting cassette.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
169
*[AS59930( GV)01/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape
player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the
cassette to warp.
%*[AS60900( ALL)02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions
*[AS61000( ALL)02/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception from
being completely clear and noise-free, such as
the following:
*[AS61100( ALL)04/95] 1. Distance/Strength
*[AS61200( ALL)02/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly related
to the distance the signal must travel. The
listenable range of an average FM signal is
approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond
this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe
area and the signal becomes weaker.
*[AS61400( ALL)04/95] 2. Terrain
*[AS61500( ALL)02/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of
the area over which the signal travels may
prevent the FM signal from being noise-free.
*[AS61700( ALL)01/95] If there is a building or large structure between
the antenna and station, some of the signal
“bends” around the building, but certain spots
receive almost no signal. Moving out of the
“shadow” of the structure will allow the station
to return to normal.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
170
*[AS61800( ALL)01/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or
structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal
signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and
distortion. Cancellation effects are most
prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can
become quite severe in hilly terrain and
depressed roadways.
*[AS61900( ALL)01/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono
blend circuit has been incorporated into this
system. This feature automatically switches a
weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,
which improves the quality of reception.
*[AS62000( ALL)01/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions
on AM frequencies. These can be caused by
power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and
thunderstorms.
*[AS62100( ALL)01/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal
Capture and Overload. This can occur when
listening to a weak station and when passing
another broadcast tower. The close station may
capture the more distant station, although the
displayed frequency does not change. While
passing the tower, the station may switch back
and forth a few times before returning to the
original station.
*[AS62200( ALL)01/95] When several broadcast towers are present
(common in metropolitan areas) several stations
may overload the receiver, resulting in
considerable station changing, mixing and
distortion.
*[AS62300( ALL)01/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM
and FM bands has been incorporated into this
system to reduce strong signal capture and
overload.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
171
%*[AS62400( ALL)08/89] All About Radio Frequencies
*[AS62500( ALL)01/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
establishes the frequencies that AM and FM
radio stations may use for their broadcasts. The
allowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600,
1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7,
107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.
*[AS62600( ALL)01/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given
area. This radio will tune to each of these
frequencies using MANUAL TUNE and no fine
tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use
other frequencies.
*[AS62700( ALL)02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a
“rounded-off” frequency which is not the
frequency they actually broadcast on. For
example, a radio station that is assigned a
frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”
even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM
broadcast frequency.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
172
%*[AS62800( ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and Service
Information
*[AS62900( ALL)07/90] ❑Warranty
*[AS63000( ALL)03/95] Your sound system is warranted for three years
or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever
comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty
booklet for further information. Ask your dealer
for a copy of this limited warranty.
*[AS63200( ALL)07/90] ❑Service
*[AS63300( ALL)01/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio
systems with a comprehensive service and repair
program. If anything should go wrong with
your Ford audio system, return to your dealer
for service. There is a nationwide network of
qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist
you.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
149
Electronic Sound Systems
% [AS10315( GV)05/94]
full page art:0060663-A
Luxury Audio System (Analog)
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
150
[AS10317( V)07/94]
full page art:0060664-B
Luxury Audio System (Digital, with factory-installed CD
Changer)
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
151
*[AS10319( GV)03/95] Luxury Audio System
*[AS10320( GV)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS10330( GV)04/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
*[AS10340( GV)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the
radio on. Press again to turn it off.
*[AS10351( GV)04/95]
How to adjust the volume
*[AS10352( GV)05/95] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to the right to
increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume.
[AS10353( V)04/94] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off (with the
“VOL/PUSH ON” button), the volume
will remain in the position it was set
at when radio power is switched back
on (digital systems only).
*[AS10354( GV)04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS10355( GV)04/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
frequency band. Pushing the “AM/FM” button
causes the frequency band to switch from “AM”
to “FM1” to “FM2” to “AM”, changing one band
to the next each time the button is pressed.
These functions are used with the station
memory buttons described under How to tune
radio stations.
%*[AS10356( GV)05/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS10357( GV)01/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a
particular station. You can use the “TUNE”,
“SEEK”, “SCAN” or memory buttons.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
152
*[AS10358( GV)05/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function
[AS10359( GV)03/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time by pressing and
releasing either the left bor right aside of
the “TUNE” button. To change frequencies
quickly, press and hold down either the right
or left side of the “TUNE” button.
*[AS10360( GV)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS10361( GV)04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS10362( GV)03/95] Press the right aside of the “SEEK” button
to select the next listenable station up the
frequency band. Press the left bside of the
button to select the next listenable station
down the frequency band. By holding the
button down, listenable stations can be
passed over to reach the desired station.
*[AS10363( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function
*[AS10364( GV)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the
scan mode up the frequency band, stopping
on each listenable station for approximately
five seconds.
*[AS10365( GV)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled station, press the “SCAN” button
again.
*[AS10366( GV)01/95] ❑Setting the station MEMORY PRESET buttons
*[AS10367( GV)01/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2)
[AS10368( GV)05/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
to the desired frequencies:
*[AS10369( GV)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
153
*[AS10370( GV)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold
the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS10371( GV)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
*[AS10372( GV)01/95]
Using the Automatic Memory Store feature
(“AUTOSET”)
*[AS10373( GV)01/95] If the memory buttons have been set, either by
using the Auto Memory Load feature or if you
have set them manually, the system is prepared
to let you use a convenient feature called
Automatic Memory Store.
*[AS10374( GV)01/95] With Auto Memory Store, you can continually
set strong stations into your memory buttons
without losing your originally set stations. Your
radio will automatically set your memory
buttons to the strong local stations.
*[AS10375( GV)01/95] Activate Auto Memory Store by pushing the
“AUTOSET” button once. Your radio will set the
first six strong stations of the band you are in
(AM, FM1 or FM2) into the memory buttons.
The display will flash “AUTO” and display the
autoset icon “A” while the stations are being set
in the memory buttons.
*[AS10376( GV)01/95] NOTE: If there are fewer than six strong
stations in the frequency band, the
remaining unfilled buttons will store
the last strong station detected on the
band. After all stations have been
filled, the radio will begin playing the
station stored on memory button 1.
*[AS10377( GV)01/95] To deactivate the Auto Memory Store mode and
return to the manually-set memory button
stations, simply push the “AUTOSET” button.
Display will show “AUTO” then “OFF”. The
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
154
next time Auto Memory Store is activated on
that band, the radio will store the next set of six
strong stations.
*[AS10378( GV)01/95]
Adjusting the tone balance of your radio
*[AS10379( GV)01/95] ❑Increasing or decreasing bass and treble
response
*[AS10380( GV)01/95] Push the “BASS/TREB” popout knob to gain
access to the bass and treble controls. Bass
control allows you to adjust the lower, bass
frequencies to your preference. The outer ring
of the “BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the bass
(turn clockwise to increase bass;
counterclockwise to decrease bass).
*[AS10381( GV)01/95] Treble control allows you to adjust the
higher, treble frequencies of your radio to
your preference. The inner ring of the
“BASS/TREB” knob adjusts the treble (turn
clockwise to increase treble; counterclockwise
to decrease treble).
*[AS10382( GV)01/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance and speaker fader
*[AS10383( GV)01/95] Push the “BAL/FADE” popout knob to gain
access to the speaker balance and fader
controls. Balance control allows you to adjust
the sound distribution between the right and
left speakers. The outer ring of “BAL/FADE”
knob adjusts the speaker balance control.
(Turn clockwise to shift the sound to the
right speakers, and turn counterclockwise to
shift the sound to the left speakers.)
*[AS10384( GV)01/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. The inner ring of the “BAL/FADE”
knob adjusts the speaker fader. (Turn
clockwise to shift the sound to the rear
speakers, and turn counterclockwise to shift
the sound to the front speakers.)
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
155
*[AS10385( V)07/94] Using the Digital Signal Processing (DSP)
Feature
*[AS10386( V)03/95] Push the “DSP” button to activate the feature.
The display will indicate which signal mode is
in effect. To change the signal mode press either
the left bor right aside of the selector button
(located under the “DSP” button).
*[AS10387( V)07/94] The following signal modes may be selected:
*[AS10388( V)07/94] 1. “HALL” — Rectangular concert hall capacity
of about 2,000.
*[AS10389( V)07/94] 2. “CHURCH” — Church with a high vault.
*[AS10390( V)07/94] 3. “JAZZ” — Jazz club with clearly reflected
sounds.
*[AS10391( V)07/94] 4. “STADIUM” — Outdoor stadium with a
capacity of about 30,000.
*[AS10392( V)07/94] 5. “NEWS” — “Voice-only” type of sound with
a limited audio band.
*[AS10393( V)07/94] To deactivate the DSP feature, press the “DSP”
button again.
%*[AS10394( GV)01/95] Your Antenna
*[AS10395( GV)03/95] Antennas for both AM and FM reception are
hidden in the back glass of your vehicle. There
is an internal antenna module that will switch
between AM and FM, when bands are changed,
for maximum reception performance.
*[AS10396( GV)01/95] NOTE: Do not attempt to adapt any other type
of antenna system to your audio
system.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
156
*[AS10397( GV)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
*[AS10398( GV)02/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
cassette tape player.
*[AS10399( GV)02/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS10400( GV)04/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped with
power loading. Once you insert a tape and push
slightly (with the open edge to the right), the
loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of
the way in and play will begin after a
momentary tape tightening process. Display
indicates “TAPE” while tape is playing.
*[AS10401( GV)01/95] If the player is in the tape mode but not in play,
pressing the “TAPE” button will activate play. If
the “TAPE” button is pressed with no tape
inserted, the display will flash “NO TAPE”.
*[AS10402( GV)02/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
*[AS10403( GV)01/95] There are six ways to quickly locate a desired
selection on the tape. You can use the fast
forward, rewind, Blank Skip, “SEEK”, “SCAN”
or “SIDE 1-2” functions. Following are brief
descriptions of each:
*[AS10404( GV)02/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape
*[AS10405( GV)03/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”
button. The radio will play while the tape is
in fast forward. The light above the “FF”
button will blink while in the fast forward
mode. Press “FF” again or press the “TAPE”
button to stop fast forwarding. At the end of
the tape, the direction automatically reverses
and plays the other side of the tape.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
157
*[AS10406( GV)02/95] ❑Rewinding the tape
*[AS10407( GV)03/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.
The radio will automatically begin playing
while the tape is rewinding. The light above
the “REW” button will blink while in the
rewind mode. Press “REW” again or press
the “TAPE” button to stop rewinding.
*[AS10408( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette
tape player
*[AS10409( GV)03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right a
side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to
the next selection on the tape. Push the left
bside to restart a currently playing tape
selection.
*[AS10410( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “Blank Skip” function with your
cassette tape player
*[AS10415( GV)01/95] Press the “Blank Skip” button to activate the
blank skip mode. After approximately 20
seconds of blank program, the tape will seek
forward to the next program.
*[AS10420( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with your
cassette tape player
*[AS10425( GV)01/95] Pushing the “SCAN” button will begin the
forward scan mode on the tape currently
playing, stopping on each tape selection for
approximately eight seconds.
*[AS10430( GV)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled tape selection, press the “SCAN”
button or the “TAPE” button.
*[AS10435( GV)02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape being
played
*[AS10440( GV)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected
by pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
158
*[AS10445( GV)02/95]
How to eject the tape
*[AS10450( GV)03/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
“EJECT” button. The tape will eject only when
in the tape mode. The cassette cannot be ejected
when the radio is playing an “AM” or “FM”
station. The system will revert to radio mode
when the cassette is ejected.
*[AS10455( GV)02/95]
Using the DolbyHB noise reduction feature
*[AS10460( GV)01/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
*[AS10465( GV)03/95] Push the kbutton to activate. When
activated, the light above the kbutton will be
illuminated.
*[AS10470( GV)01/95]
Tape error messages
*[AS10475( GV)01/95] Your cassette tape player is equipped to
diagnose certain problems you may experience.
Error codes are as follows:
*[AS10480( GV)01/95] TD E1 — Radio tries to change sides of tape 3
times in a 10 second span. Push “EJECT” and
try another tape. If problem persists, refer
problem to qualified personnel for service.
*[AS10485( GV)01/95] TD E2 — Tape eject failure. Radio tries to eject
tape and it will not eject. Push “EJECT” to eject
tape. If the tape will not eject, refer problem to
qualified personnel for service.
*[AS10490( GV)01/95] TD E3 — Loading error. Push “EJECT” to eject
tape. Reload tape. If the same error code appears
in the display, try another tape.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
159
*[AS10491( GV)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and
Tapes
*[AS10492( GV)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player
performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS10493( GV)02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to
clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS10494( GV)02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*[AS10495( GV)02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to direct
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS10496( GV)02/95] ❑If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it
before playing by putting your finger or a
pencil into one of the holes and turning the
hub until the tape is tight.
*[AS10497( GV)02/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can become
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting a cassette.
*[AS10498( GV)03/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape
player when not in use. High heat in the
vehicle can cause the cassette to warp.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
160
[AS56100( V)05/94]
full page art:0060666-A
Midline Stereo Radio
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
161
% [AS56200( GV)05/94]
full page art:0060667-A
Midline Stereo Cassette
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
162
*[AS56220( V)05/95] Midline Stereo and Stereo
Cassette Radio
*[AS56250( GV)02/95] Using the Controls on Your New Radio
*[AS56300( GV)04/95]
How to turn the radio on and off
*[AS56350( GV)01/95] Press the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to turn the
radio on. Press again to turn it off.
*[AS56400( GV)04/95]
How to adjust the volume
*[AS56450( GV)04/94] Turn the “VOL/PUSH ON” knob to the right to
increase the volume and to the left to decrease
the volume. Bars illuminate in the display to
show relative volume level.
*[AS56460( GV)04/95] NOTE: If the volume level is set above a
certain listening level when the
ignition switch is turned off, when the
ignition switch is turned back on, the
volume will come back to a “nominal”
listening level. However, if the radio
power is turned off (with the
“POWER” button), the volume will
remain in the position it was set at
when radio power is switched back on.
*[AS56500( GV)04/95]
Selecting the AM or FM frequency band
*[AS56550( GV)02/95] Push the “AM/FM” button to select the desired
frequency band or to stop/store cassette tape
(when in cassette mode). Pushing the button
more than once will alternate between AM, FM1
and FM2. These functions are used with the
station memory buttons described under How to
tune radio stations.
%*[AS56600( GV)05/95]
How to tune radio stations
*[AS56650( GV)04/95] There are four ways for you to tune in a
particular station. You can manually locate the
station using the “SCAN/TUNE” button,
“SEEK” the station, “SCAN” to the station or
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
163
select the station by using the memory buttons,
which you can set to any desired frequency.
These four methods are described below.
*[AS56660( GV)05/95] ❑Using the “TUNE” function
*[AS56700( GV)03/95] You can change the frequency up or down
one increment at a time by pressing and
releasing either the left (b) or right (a) side
of the “TUNE” button.
*[AS56750( GV)04/95] Manual tuning adjusts your radio to any
allowable broadcast frequency, whether or
not a station is present on that frequency.
(See All About Radio Frequencies in this
section.)
*[AS56800( GV)04/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function
*[AS56850( GV)04/95] This feature on your radio allows you to
automatically select listenable stations up or
down the frequency band. Press the right
(a) side of the “SEEK” button to select the
next listenable station up the frequency band.
Press the left (b) side of the button to select
the next listenable station down the
frequency band. By holding the button down,
listenable stations can be passed over to reach
the desired station.
*[AS56900( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function
*[AS56950( GV)04/95] Pressing the “SCAN” button will begin the
scan mode up the frequency band, stopping
on each listenable station for approximately
five seconds.
*[AS57000( GV)02/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled station, press the “SCAN” button
again.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
164
*[AS57050( GV)04/95] ❑Setting the Station Memory Preset buttons
*[AS57100( GV)02/95] Your radio is equipped with 6 station
memory buttons. These buttons can be used
to select up to 6 preset AM stations and 12
FM stations (6 in FM1 and 6 in FM2).
*[AS57150( GV)02/95] Follow the easy steps below to set these buttons
to the desired frequencies:
*[AS57200( GV)04/95] 1. Select a band, then select a frequency.
*[AS57300( GV)04/95] 2. Press one of the memory buttons and hold
the button until the sound returns. That
station is now held in memory on that
button.
*[AS57350( GV)04/95] 3. Follow the two steps above for each station
memory preset button you want to set.
[AS57375( GV)05/94] NOTE: If the vehicle’s battery is disconnected
the station memory preset buttons will
need to be reset.
*[AS57400( GV)02/95]
Adjusting the tone balance and speaker
output of your radio
*[AS57450( GV)04/95] ❑Increasing or decreasing bass response
*[AS57500( GV)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “BASS” button to
increase bass; press the bottom (d) of the
“BASS” button to decrease bass.
*[AS57550( GV)04/95] ❑Increasing or decreasing treble response
*[AS57600( GV)03/95] Press the top (c) of the “TREBLE” button to
increase treble; press the bottom (d) of the
treble button to decrease treble.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
165
*[AS57650( GV)04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker balance
*[AS57700( GV)03/95] Balance control allows you to adjust the
sound distribution between the right and left
speakers. Press the top (c) of the “BAL”
button to shift the sound to the right
speakers, and press the bottom (d) of the
“BAL” button to shift the sound to the left
speakers.
*[AS57750( GV)04/95] ❑Adjusting speaker fader
*[AS57800( GV)03/95] Fade control allows you to adjust the sound
distribution between the front and rear
speakers. Press the top (c) of the “FADE”
button to shift the sound to the front
speakers, and press the bottom (d) of the
“FADE” button to shift the sound to the back
speakers.
*[AS57850( GV)04/95] NOTE: Illuminated bars in the display show
relative levels of bass and treble, and
positions of speaker balance and fader
functions (left to right, front to rear).
*[AS57900( GV)02/95] Using the Controls of Your Cassette Tape
Player
*[AS57950( GV)04/95] NOTE: Radio power must be on to use the
cassette tape player or eject a tape.
*[AS58000( GV)02/95]
How to insert a tape
*[AS58050( GV)09/94] Your cassette tape player is equipped with
power loading. Once you insert a tape and push
slightly (with the open edge to the right), the
loading mechanism draws the tape the rest of
the way in and play will begin after a
momentary tape tightening process.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
166
[AS58150( GV)04/94] NOTE: A cassette tape can be loaded with the
ignition on whether or not the radio
power is on. Inserting a cassette tape
with the radio power off will turn the
audio system on. After the cassette is
ejected, radio play will return.
*[AS58200( GV)02/95]
How to locate a desired track on the tape
*[AS58250( GV)09/94] There are four ways to quickly locate a desired
selection on the tape. You can use the fast
forward, rewind, “SEEK”, or “SCAN” function.
Following are brief descriptions of each.
*[AS58300( GV)02/95] ❑Fast forwarding the tape
*[AS58350( GV)01/95] To fast forward the tape, press the “FF”
button. The radio will begin playing until fast
forward is manually stopped (by pushing the
“TAPE” button) or the end of the tape is
reached.
*[AS58400( GV)01/95] At the end of the tape, the direction
automatically reverses and plays the other
side of the tape.
*[AS58450( GV)02/95] ❑Rewinding the tape
*[AS58500( GV)01/95] To rewind the tape, press the “REW” button.
The radio will begin playing until rewind is
manually stopped (by pushing the “TAPE”
button) or the beginning of the tape is
reached.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
167
*[AS58550( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SEEK” function with your cassette
tape player
*[AS58600( GV)03/95] While in the tape mode, push the right (a)
side of the “SEEK” button to seek forward to
the next selection on the tape. Push the left
(b) side to seek the previous tape selection.
*[AS58650( GV)01/95] ❑Using the “SCAN” function with your
cassette tape player
*[AS58700( GV)01/95] Press the “SCAN” button to begin the
forward scan mode on the tape currently
playing, stopping on each tape selection for
approximately an eight-second sampling
(display indicates “SC”).
*[AS58800( GV)01/95] To stop the scan mode on the presently
sampled tape selection, press “SCAN” a
second time.
*[AS58850( GV)02/95] ❑How to change the side of the tape being
played
*[AS58900( GV)01/95] The alternate side of the tape can be selected
by pressing the “SIDE 1-2” button.
*[AS58950( GV)02/95]
How to eject the tape
*[AS59000( GV)01/95] To stop the tape and eject the cassette, press the
“EJ” button. The radio will resume playing if the
radio power is on. The tape cartridge can be
ejected with radio power (and/or ignition) on or
off.
*[AS59050( GV)01/95]
How to store the tape
*[AS59100( GV)01/95] Press the “AM/FM” button to stop the tape
player and resume radio play.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
168
*[AS59150( GV)02/95]
Using the DolbyHB noise reduction feature
*[AS59200( GV)02/95] NOTE: Noise reduction system manufactured
under license from Dolby Labs
Licensing Corporation. “Dolby” and
double-D symbol are trademarks of
Dolby Laboratories Licensing
Corporation.
*[AS59250( GV)04/95] Push the kbutton to activate Dolby B Noise
Reduction. Push again to deactivate.
*[AS59860( GV)02/95] Tips on Caring for the Cassette Player and
Tapes
*[AS59870( GV)02/95] In order to keep your cassette tape player
performing the way it was meant to, read and
follow these simple precautions:
*[AS59880( GV)02/95] ❑Using a Ford Cassette Cleaning Cartridge to
clean the tape player head after 10-12 hours
of play will help maintain the best playback
sound and proper tape operation.
*[AS59890( GV)02/95] ❑Only cassettes that are 90 minutes long or
less should be used. Tapes longer than 90
minutes are thinner and subject to breakage
or may jam the tape player mechanism.
*[AS59900( GV)02/95] ❑Protect cassettes from exposure to direct
sunlight, high humidity and extreme heat or
cold. If they are exposed to extreme
conditions, allow them to reach a moderate
temperature before playing.
*[AS59910( GV)02/95] ❑If a tape is loose inside the cassette, tighten it
before playing by putting your finger or a
pencil into one of the holes and turning the
hub until the tape is tight.
*[AS59920( GV)01/95] ❑Loose labels on cassette tapes can become
lodged in the mechanism. Remove any loose
label material before inserting cassette.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
169
*[AS59930( GV)01/95] ❑Do not leave a tape in the cassette tape
player. High heat in the vehicle can cause the
cassette to warp.
%*[AS60900( ALL)02/95] Common Radio Reception Conditions
*[AS61000( ALL)02/95] Several conditions prevent FM reception from
being completely clear and noise-free, such as
the following:
*[AS61100( ALL)04/95] 1. Distance/Strength
*[AS61200( ALL)02/95] The strength of the FM signal is directly related
to the distance the signal must travel. The
listenable range of an average FM signal is
approximately 25 miles (40 kilometers). Beyond
this distance, the radio is operating in a fringe
area and the signal becomes weaker.
*[AS61400( ALL)04/95] 2. Terrain
*[AS61500( ALL)02/95] The terrain (hilly, mountainous, tall buildings) of
the area over which the signal travels may
prevent the FM signal from being noise-free.
*[AS61700( ALL)01/95] If there is a building or large structure between
the antenna and station, some of the signal
“bends” around the building, but certain spots
receive almost no signal. Moving out of the
“shadow” of the structure will allow the station
to return to normal.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
170
*[AS61800( ALL)01/95] When the radio waves are reflected off objects or
structures, the reflected signal cancels the normal
signal, causing the antenna to pick up noise and
distortion. Cancellation effects are most
prominent in metropolitan areas, but also can
become quite severe in hilly terrain and
depressed roadways.
*[AS61900( ALL)01/95] To minimize these conditions, a stereo/mono
blend circuit has been incorporated into this
system. This feature automatically switches a
weak stereo signal to a clearer monaural signal,
which improves the quality of reception.
*[AS62000( ALL)01/95] Several sources of static are normal conditions
on AM frequencies. These can be caused by
power lines, electric fences, traffic lights and
thunderstorms.
*[AS62100( ALL)01/95] Another reception phenomenon is Strong Signal
Capture and Overload. This can occur when
listening to a weak station and when passing
another broadcast tower. The close station may
capture the more distant station, although the
displayed frequency does not change. While
passing the tower, the station may switch back
and forth a few times before returning to the
original station.
*[AS62200( ALL)01/95] When several broadcast towers are present
(common in metropolitan areas) several stations
may overload the receiver, resulting in
considerable station changing, mixing and
distortion.
*[AS62300( ALL)01/95] Automatic gain control circuitry for both AM
and FM bands has been incorporated into this
system to reduce strong signal capture and
overload.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
171
%*[AS62400( ALL)08/89] All About Radio Frequencies
*[AS62500( ALL)01/95] The Federal Communications Commission (FCC)
establishes the frequencies that AM and FM
radio stations may use for their broadcasts. The
allowable frequencies are, AM: 530, 540...1600,
1610 kHz in 10 kHz steps; FM: 87.9, 88.1...107.7,
107.9 MHz in 0.2 MHz steps.
*[AS62600( ALL)01/95] Not all frequencies will be assigned to a given
area. This radio will tune to each of these
frequencies using MANUAL TUNE and no fine
tuning is necessary as radio stations may not use
other frequencies.
*[AS62700( ALL)02/95] Some FM radio stations advertise a
“rounded-off” frequency which is not the
frequency they actually broadcast on. For
example, a radio station that is assigned a
frequency of 98.7 MHz may call itself “Radio 99”
even though 99.0 MHz is not an allowable FM
broadcast frequency.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
172
%*[AS62800( ALL)01/95] Important Warranty and Service
Information
*[AS62900( ALL)07/90] ❑Warranty
*[AS63000( ALL)03/95] Your sound system is warranted for three years
or 36,000 miles (60,000 kilometers), whichever
comes first. Consult your vehicle warranty
booklet for further information. Ask your dealer
for a copy of this limited warranty.
*[AS63200( ALL)07/90] ❑Service
*[AS63300( ALL)01/95] At Ford Electronics, we stand behind our audio
systems with a comprehensive service and repair
program. If anything should go wrong with
your Ford audio system, return to your dealer
for service. There is a nationwide network of
qualified Ford authorized repair centers to assist
you.
File:rcasv.ex
Update:Thu Feb 15 08:03:35 1996
173
Driving Your Crown
Victoria
%*[DR00500( ALL)03/93] Driving with an Automatic
Overdrive Transmission
*[DR00700( BCGV)01/95] The automatic overdrive transmission operates
very much like a regular automatic transmission,
except it offers the extra overdrive feature.
%*[DR00800( ALL)01/95] Putting Your Vehicle in Gear
*[DR00950( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
Hold the brake pedal down while you
move the gearshift lever from position to
position. If you do not hold the brake
pedal down, your vehicle may move
unexpectedly and injure someone.
*[DR00960( GV)01/95] To move the shifter out of P (Park), the ignition
key must be turned to either the OFF or the ON
position. This vehicle is also equipped with the
brake shift interlock safety feature which
prevents shifting the transmission out of the
P (Park) position without the brake pedal being
depressed if the key is in the ON position.
*[DR00975( ALL)03/95] To operate:
*[DR00980( ALL)01/95] 1. Start the engine.
*[DR00985( ALL)01/95] 2. Depress and hold the brake pedal.
*[DR00990( ALL)01/95] 3. Move the gearshift lever out of P (Park).
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
174
%*[DR00995( ALL)04/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a Brake Shift
Interlock safety feature. This feature prevents the
gearshift from being moved from the P (Park)
position until the brake pedal is depressed. This
feature is active when the ignition is in the ON
position. If the gearshift lever CANNOT be
moved from P (Park) with the brake pedal
depressed:
*[DR01000( ALL)01/95] 1. Turn the engine off and remove the ignition
key.
*[DR01005( ALL)01/95] 2. Apply parking brake.
*[DR01010( ALL)01/95] 3. Reinsert the ignition key and turn clockwise
to the first position (OFF).
*[DR01020( ALL)01/95] 4. Depress the brake pedal, move the gearshift
lever to N (Neutral) and start the engine.
*[DR01025( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
DO NOT DRIVE YOUR VEHICLE UNTIL
YOU VERIFY THAT THE BRAKELAMPS
ARE WORKING.
*[DR01027( ALL)05/95] If you need to shift out of P (Park) by using the
alternate procedure described above, it is
possible that a fuse has blown and that your
brakelamps may also not be functional. Please
refer to the chapter titled Servicing Your Crown
Victoria in this Owner Guide for instructions on
checking and replacing fuses.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
175
% [DR01050( GV)03/95]
half page art:0010213-F
The positions of the gearshift
*[DR01500( ALL)11/94] Once the gearshift is secure in the desired
position, release the brake pedal and use the
accelerator as necessary.
%*[DR01700( ALL)01/95] R (Reverse)
*[DR01800( ALL)02/95] With the gearshift in the R (Reverse) position,
the vehicle will move backward. You should
always come to a complete stop before shifting
into or out of R (Reverse).
*[DR01830( ALL)01/95] N (Neutral)
[DR01860( ALL)05/94] In N (Neutral), the wheels of the transmission
are not locked. Your vehicle will roll freely, even
on the slightest incline, unless the parking brake
or brakes are on.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
176
%*[DR01900( ALL)01/95] Driving
*[DR01930( GV)01/95] Your vehicle’s gearshift is on the steering
column. The Transmission Control Switch (TCS)
is located on the end of the gearshift lever. The
Transmission Control Indicator Light (O/D OFF)
is located on the instrument panel. You can put
the gearshift lever in any of the several
positions.
*[DR01950( GV)01/95] The O/D OFF light is off (not illuminated)
during normal vehicle operation. This allows the
transmission to upshift and downshift from 1st
through 4th gears. When the TCS is pressed, the
Transmission Control Indicator Light will
illuminate (O/D OFF) on the instrument panel.
When this O/D OFF is illuminated the
transmission will upshift and downshift from 1st
through 3rd gears.
[DR01957( ALL)11/94] If the O/D OFF light does not come “on” when
the TCS is depressed or if the light “FLASHES”
when you are driving, have your vehicle
serviced at the first opportunity. If this condition
persists, damage could occur to the transmission.
*[DR01961( BCGV)01/95] To return the transmission to normal operation
(1st through 4th gear) depress the TCS again.
This switch may be used to cancel overdrive any
time the vehicle is being driven. Each time your
vehicle is started, the overdrive system will
automatically be in the normal overdrive mode
and the light will not be illuminated.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
177
%*[DR02000( GV)04/95]
When to use j(Overdrive)
*[DR02100( ALL)01/95] Overdrive is the usual driving position for an
automatic overdrive transmission. It works the
same way Drive works, automatically upshifting
or downshifting as the vehicle speeds or slows.
*[DR02200( ALL)01/95] However, Overdrive also shifts into a fourth
gear — an overdrive gear — when your vehicle
cruises at an appropriate consistent speed for
any length of time. This fourth gear will increase
your fuel economy when you travel at cruising
speeds.
[DR02520( GV)05/95]
When to use j(Overdrive) — with
Transmission Control Switch activated
(TCS)
[DR02603( GV)01/94] Overdrive may not be appropriate for certain
terrain. If the transmission shifts back and forth
between Third and Fourth gears while you are
driving on hilly roads or if your vehicle does
not have adequate power for climbing hills,
press the TCS located on the shift lever.
*[DR02605( BCGV)01/95] You can depress the TCS at any speed.
*[DR02610( ALL)01/95]
When to use 2 (Second)
*[DR02620( ALL)01/95] Use 2 (Second) for start-up on slippery roads or
to give you more engine braking to slow your
vehicle on downgrades.
*[DR02700( ALL)01/95]
When to use 1 (Low)
*[DR02800( ALL)03/95] Use 1 (Low) when driving down steep grades. It
gives more engine braking to slow your vehicle
than 2 (Second) on the downgrades. You can
upshift from 1 (Low) to 2 (Second) or from
1 (Low) to Overdrive at any speed.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
178
*[DR03000( ALL)01/95] P (Park)
*[DR03100( ALL)01/95] Always come to a complete stop before you shift
into P (Park). Make sure that the gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park). This locks the
transmission and prevents the rear wheels from
rotating.
*[DR03200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
*[DR03225( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Never leave your vehicle unattended
while it is running.
*[DR03300( GV)01/95] You can tell a column-mounted gearshift is
securely latched in P (Park) if the lever is
adjacent to the P (Park) and you cannot move it
without pulling it toward you and rotating it
downward.
% [DR09720( ALL)03/95] Traction-Lok Axle (If equipped)
[DR09730( ALL)12/91] This axle provides added traction on slippery
surfaces, particularly when one wheel is on a
poor traction surface. Under normal conditions
the Traction-Lok axle functions as a standard
rear axle.
*[DR09740( ALL)03/93] Extended use of other than matching size tires
on a Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness. This loss of
effectiveness does not affect normal driving and
should not be noticeable to the driver.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
179
*[DR09750( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine
with one wheel off the ground, such as
when changing a tire.
%*[DR09760( BCGV)03/95] Traction Assist
TM
(If equipped)
*[DR09770( BCGV)01/95] Your vehicle may be equipped with the optional
Traction Assist
TM
system. This system helps
prevent wheel spin in order to improve tire
traction and is an especially useful feature when
you drive in hilly areas or on slippery, icy or
snowy roads.
*[DR09780( BCGV)03/95] Traction Assist
TM
works automatically by rapidly
applying and releasing the brakes to prevent one
or both of the rear drive wheels from spinning
during acceleration.
[DR09785( BCGV)03/95] During the Traction Assist
TM
function, which
most often occurs during low speed acceleration
on slippery surfaces, a noise may be heard
coming from the engine compartment. This noise
is created by the ABS pump and is normal and
may last for a few seconds during the
acceleration of the vehicle.
*[DR09790( BCGV)03/95] In general, this system improves your vehicle’s
stability and acceleration performance when road
conditions warrant. Traction Assist is fully
effective up to approximately 25 mph
(40 km/h). At 25 mph (40 km/h) the function
begins to taper off until it no longer operates
above 34 mph (55 km/h).
[DR09793( BCGV)01/95] If the Traction Assist
TM
system is cycled
excessively, the system will shut down to
prevent the rear brakes from overheating.
During this shutdown period, the word OFF in
the traction assist switch will be illuminated
showing that the traction assist system is
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
180
inoperative. A cooling down period is required
to prevent damage to the rear brakes. This time
period varies and depends on brake usage
during the cooling down period. Anti-Lock
braking is not affected and will function
normally during the cool down period.
[DR09795( BCGV)05/95] NOTE: Traction-Lok axles are not an available
option on vehicles equipped with
traction assist.
*[DR09800( ALL)01/95] Steering Your Vehicle
%*[DR09900( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle comes with power steering. Power
steering uses energy from the engine to help
steer your vehicle.
%*[DR09950( ALL)04/95] If the amount of effort needed to steer your
vehicle changes at a constant vehicle speed, have
the power steering system checked. If the power
steering system breaks down (or if the engine is
turned off), you can steer the vehicle manually
but it takes more effort.
*[DR10000( ALL)01/95] Never hold the steering wheel to the extreme
right or left for more than five seconds if the
engine is running. This can damage the power
steering pump.
[DR10200( BCGV)12/94] Speed Sensitive Power Steering
(If equipped)
*[DR10400( GV)01/95] The steering system in your vehicle is speed
sensitive. This means that the steering effort is
light for parking and heavier for highway
driving. However, if you have to swerve around
an object or another vehicle, your steering will
have full power assist.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
181
%*[DR10500( ALL)03/95] Brakes
%*[DR10600( ALL)01/95] Applying the Brakes
[DR10650( ALL)05/94]
Braking non ABS models
[DR11060( GV)12/91] Your vehicle has front and rear disc brakes with
anti-lock (optional). They adjust automatically as
the brake pads wear down.
*[DR11100( ALL)04/95] Apply the brake pedal gradually. Use the
“squeeze” technique — push on the brake pedal
with a steadily increasing force. This allows the
wheels to continue to roll while you are slowing
down, which lets you steer properly.
[DR11300( ALL)03/95] On vehicles without anti-lock brakes, extreme
braking can make the wheels lock and slide,
possibly decreasing your control of the steering.
If you lock the wheels, release the brake pedal
and repeat the “squeeze” technique.
[DR11310( ALL)05/95]
Braking with ABS brakes
[DR11400( ALL)03/95] On vehicles with anti-lock brakes, the wheels
will not lock and slide when you press down
hard on the brake pedal. The anti-lock brakes
automatically start releasing and reapplying the
front brakes independently and the rear brakes
together whenever your wheels start to lock. Do
not “pump” the brake pedal on vehicles
equipped with anti-lock brakes. When this
happens, you will feel the brake pedal pulse.
This “pulse” may be an unfamiliar feeling but it
is normal and indicates the ABS is working as
designed.
*[DR11650( ALL)05/95] Do not drive with your foot resting on the brake
pedal; you will wear out the linings and increase
your vehicle’s stopping distance. Brake rotor
damage may also eventually occur.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
182
*[DR11700( ALL)03/95] NOTE: If you are driving down a long or
steep hill, shift to a lower gear and do
not apply your brakes continuously. If
you apply your brakes continuously,
they may overheat and become less
effective.
%*[DR11800( ALL)03/95] Occasional brake squeal during light to moderate
stops does not affect the function of the brake
system and is normal. However, if the squeal
becomes louder or more frequent, have your
brakes inspected by your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
[DR11900( ALL)05/94] Ford Motor Company has not found any
detrimental effects of popular mobile radio
transmitting equipment installed on vehicles
with the anti-lock brake system, if the equipment
is installed according to the manufacturer’s
instructions. However, if mobile radio
transmitting equipment is installed in your
vehicle and, if either the anti-lock brake system
cycles or the check anti-lock light comes on at
any time other than right after you turn the key
to ON or during a sudden stop, have your
mobile radio dealer inspect the installation.
%*[DR12000( ALL)03/95] Parking Brake
*[DR12050( ALL)01/95] The parking brake should be used whenever
you park your vehicle.
[DR12500( BCGV)03/95] The parking brake pedal is suspended just below
the bottom of the instrument panel to the left of
the brake pedal.
[DR13000( GV)03/95] To manually set the parking brake after parking
your vehicle, apply the brake pedal with your
right foot and hold it while you push the
parking brake down firmly and fully with your
left foot. The brake system warning light will
glow. The parking brake will not set with the
transmission in any forward gear position.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
183
[DR13600( GV)03/94]
one third page art:0010319-E
The parking brake
*[DR13800( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING
Always set the parking brake fully and
make sure that the gearshift is securely
latched in P (Park).
*[DR14125( GV)01/95] Your vehicle has an automatic parking brake
release. As you move the gearshift selector to
any forward gear with the engine running, the
parking brake automatically releases. Your
parking brake will not release automatically
when you shift into R (Reverse). To release the
parking brake manually, pull the brake release
handle [marked (P)] located on the lower left
corner of the instrument panel. The pedal is now
released and will reset the next time you press
the pedal. The Brake System Warning Light will
glow if the parking brake is not fully released
when the engine is running.
*[DR14175( GV)11/91] RWARNING
To prevent personal injury, do not release
the parking brake while outside the
vehicle.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
184
*[DR14200( ALL)03/95] Always check the Brake Warning Light each
time you start your engine. Driving with the
parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear
out quickly and will reduce the fuel economy.
*[DR14300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
If the parking brake is fully released, but
the Brake System light remains on, have
the brakes checked immediately. They
may not be working properly.
[DR14400( ALL)07/93] The parking brake system is designed for static
parking only and is not designed to stop a
moving vehicle, but you can use the parking
brake to stop your vehicle in an emergency if
the normal brakes fail. However, since the
parking brake applies only the rear brakes, the
stopping distance will increase greatly and the
handling of your vehicle will be adversely
affected.
% [DR14415( GV)05/94] Rear Air Suspension System
(If equipped)
[DR14425( GV)10/90] If your vehicle is equipped with an automatic
load leveling rear air suspension system, it will
maintain the rear vehicle height at a constant
level by automatically adding air or releasing air
from the rear air springs to offset changes in
vehicle loads.
[DR14430( GV)03/94] A shutoff switch is located in the trunk on the
right hand vertical trim panel. If this switch is in
the OFF position, the automatic leveling system
will not operate. The switch should be OFF
whenever jacking up or towing the vehicle. If
you have the mechanical cluster, “AIR SUSP”
will appear in the cluster, if you have an
electronic cluster, “CHECK AIR SUSPENSION”
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
185
will appear in the message center when the
ignition switch is in the ON position, and either
the shutoff switch is in the OFF position, or a
system fault has been detected.
*[DR14440( GV)01/95] Normal vehicle operation does not require any
action by the driver.
*[DR14450( GV)05/95] RWARNING
On vehicles equipped with Air
Suspension, turn OFF the Air Suspension
switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing
your vehicle.
[DR14460( GV)03/92]
half page art:0010164-A
The air suspension switch — located on the right-hand
vertical trim panel
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
186
*[DR14500( ALL)01/95] Driving Under Special Conditions
%*[DR14600( ALL)01/95] Tips for Safe Driving
*[DR14700( ALL)03/95] As with any new vehicle, yours may drive and
handle differently from your previous vehicle.
Use care until you become accustomed to its
various features and driving characteristics.
*[DR14800( ALL)03/95] Operate your vehicle within reasonable limits.
Sudden acceleration, deceleration, turning, or
combinations of these maneuvers can cause a
vehicle to behave differently than anticipated.
%*[DR15200( ALL)01/95] Driving in Bad Weather
%*[DR15300( ALL)01/95]
Slippery roads
*[DR15400( ALL)03/95] Drive cautiously on wet or snowy roads:
*[DR15500( ALL)03/95] ❑Do not quickly move the steering wheel
unless necessary.
*[DR15600( ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slower than you normally would.
[DR15700( ALL)03/95] ❑Do not use speed control.
*[DR15800( ALL)01/95] ❑Give your vehicle more distance to stop.
*[DR15900( ALL)03/92] ❑Pump the brake pedal steadily and evenly to
avoid locking your wheels. (Does not apply
to vehicles with anti-lock brakes.)
*[DR16000( ALL)02/93] ❑Consider using one of the lower gears.
*[DR16200( BCGV)01/93] RWARNING
To avoid skidding and losing control on
slippery roads, do not downshift into First
(1) when you are moving faster than
20 mph (32 km/h).
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
187
*[DR16225( ALL)03/95] RWARNING
If your vehicle has speed control, do not
use it on slippery roads. You could lose
control of your vehicle and could injure
someone.
[DR16250( GV)05/94] If your vehicle gets stuck (for example, in mud
or snow), you may try to “rock” it out of the
spot. Shift, in a steady rhythm, between forward
(2 [Second] gear is the recommended forward
gear) and reverse gears. At the same time, press
lightly on the accelerator.
*[DR16400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph
(55 km/h). The tires may fail and injure a
passenger or bystander.
[DR16500( ALL)12/94] By moving the vehicle backward and forward,
you may gain enough momentum to move out
of the spot. Do not rock the vehicle for more
than a few minutes. This may overheat the
engine, damage the transmission, or damage the
tires. If you are still stuck after a minute or two
of rocking, call for a tow truck.
%*[DR16700( ALL)01/95]
High water
*[DR16800( ALL)01/95] Do not drive through flooded areas unless you
are sure that the water is below the bottom of
the wheel rims.
*[DR16900( ALL)04/94] If you must drive through high water, drive
slowly. You may have limited traction or wet
brakes, so allow extra stopping distance because
your vehicle will not stop as quickly as usual.
*[DR17000( ALL)01/95] After you drive through the standing water,
apply your brakes gently several times as your
vehicle moves slowly. This helps to dry the
brakes.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
188
%*[DR17100( ALL)03/95] Driving With a Heavy Load
*[DR17200( ALL)01/95] There are limits to the amount of weight your
vehicle can carry or tow. The total weight of
your vehicle, plus the weight of the passengers
and cargo, should never be more than the Gross
Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR). Also, the weight
that your vehicle carries over the front axle and
rear axle should never be more than the Gross
Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) for the respective
axle.
% [DR17300( ALL)05/94] You can find your vehicle’s GVWR and GAWR
on the Safety Compliance Certification Label on
the left front door lock facing or the door latch
post pillar.
*[DR17400( ALL)01/95] The weight limits of your vehicle’s tires affect
the GVWR or GAWR limitations. Usage of
replacement tires with higher weight limit than
originals does not increase GVWR or GAWR.
Usage of lower capacity replacement tires may
lower GVWR and GAWR limitations.
*[DR17500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
If the GVWR or the GAWR specified on
the Safety Compliance Certification Label
is exceeded, your vehicle may be damaged
or you may lose control and injure
someone.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
189
%*[DR17503( ALL)01/95] Limiting Your Vehicle’s Load
*[DR17506( ALL)01/95] The load that you add to your vehicle must not
exceed the maximum load stated on the Safety
Compliance Certification Decal attached to the
left front door pillar.
*[DR17509( ALL)01/95] To figure the weight of your vehicle’s load, add
the weights of:
*[DR17512( ALL)01/95] ❑the driver and passengers
*[DR17515( ALL)01/95] ❑luggage and any other items that you put in
your vehicle
*[DR17518( ALL)01/95] ❑the tongue load of the loaded trailer
*[DR17521( ALL)01/95] ❑the weight of any equipment that has been
added to your vehicle since it was delivered
to your dealer
*[DR17524( ALL)01/95] If you do not know the actual weights of these
items, use the following procedure to figure the
weight of a load:
*[DR17527( ALL)01/95] 1. Weigh your vehicle without the driver,
passengers and luggage. You might take
your vehicle to a shipping company or an
inspection station for trucks.
*[DR17530( ALL)01/95] 2. Then weigh your vehicle with the driver,
passengers and luggage.
*[DR17533( ALL)01/95] 3. Subtract the first reading from the second to
figure the total weight of the load.
*[DR17536( ALL)01/95] After determining this load, you must also make
sure that the total weight of your vehicle, plus
the load it carries, is less than its GVWR. Also,
make sure that the weight your vehicle carries
over each axle is less than the GAWR for the
respective axle.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
190
*[DR17539( ALL)01/95] If your vehicle exceeds the GVWR, remove cargo
from your vehicle accordingly. If your vehicle
exceeds the GAWR for either axle, shift the load
or remove cargo accordingly.
*[DR17542( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Improper distribution of your vehicle’s
load or carrying weight in excess of the
amount shown on the tire decal can cause
rapid tire wear or loss of vehicle control.
%*[DR17600( GV)01/95] Trailer Towing (may require
trailer tow option package)
*[DR17650( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle does not come from the factory
fully equipped to tow. No towing packages are
available through Ford or Lincoln/Mercury
dealers.
*[DR17700( ALL)01/95] Because towing a trailer puts extra strain on
your vehicle, you must follow certain
precautions for your safety and the good of your
vehicle:
*[DR17800( ALL)01/95] ❑Stay within the load limits for towing your
vehicle. (See Trailer towing specifications in this
chapter.)
*[DR17900( ALL)01/95] ❑Carefully and thoroughly prepare your
vehicle for towing, making sure to use the
right equipment and to attach it properly.
(See Preparing to Tow in this chapter.)
*[DR18000( ALL)01/95] ❑Use extra caution when driving your vehicle
while you tow. (See Driving while you tow in
this chapter.)
*[DR18100( ALL)01/95] ❑Service your vehicle more frequently if you
tow a trailer. (See Servicing your vehicle if you
tow in this chapter.)
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
191
*[DR18175( ALL)01/95] Ten to 15% of the loaded trailer’s weight should
be on the tongue. However, the tongue load
should never exceed 10% of the maximum
weight that your vehicle can safely tow.
*[DR18250( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not tow a trailer when the temporary
spare tire is being used.
[DR18300( ALL)12/94] Your vehicle is classified as a light duty towing
vehicle. The amount of weight that you can
safely tow depends on the optional equipment
on your vehicle. See the following chart.
% [DR18400( ALL)03/90]
Trailer towing specifications
[DR19000( V)05/95]
ten pica chart:0011371-A
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
192
*[DR20900( ALL)01/95] Preparing to Tow
*[DR21000( ALL)01/95] For your safety and for the good of your
vehicle, use the right equipment for the type of
trailer you tow. Also, make sure that all towing
equipment is properly attached to your vehicle.
If you are not certain that you are using the
right equipment in the proper manner, see your
Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
*[DR21100( ALL)01/95] Do not use hitches that clamp onto your
vehicle’s bumper. The bumper is not designed to
bear the load.
*[DR21125( ALL)01/95] Always check the pressure in all your vehicle’s
tires when preparing to tow (see inflation
recommendation on the tire label).
%*[DR21150( ALL)01/95]
Using the hitch
[DR21350( V)05/95] Your vehicle uses one of two types of hitches
(Class III hitch is an option available in Canada
only), depending on how much your trailer
weighs. The Class I hitch will allow you to tow
a trailer weighing up to 2,000 lbs. (907 kg.).
Because this type of hitch places the tongue load
of a trailer on the rear wheels of your vehicle,
you must distribute the load in your trailer so
that only 10 to 15% of the total weight of the
trailer is on the tongue.
[DR21500( V)05/95] A Class III hitch and the optional trailer tow III
package (option available in Canada only) will
allow you to tow a trailer weighing up to to
5,000 lbs. (2,270 kg). This type of hitch
distributes the tongue load of a trailer evenly
between the front and rear wheel of your vehicle
and the trailer wheels.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
193
*[DR21600( ALL)01/95] Tie down the load so that it does not shift and
change the weight on the hitch. This will
prevent damage to your vehicle and make your
vehicle easier to handle.
[DR21607( V)05/95] Hook-Up and Adjustment Procedure —
Load Equalizing Hitch (option available in
Canada only)
*[DR21610( GV)01/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a rear air
suspension system. When hooking up a trailer
using a load equalizing hitch, always use the
following procedure:
*[DR21615( GV)01/95] 1. Place the unloaded vehicle on a level
surface. With the ignition on and all doors
closed, allow the vehicle to level
automatically (approximately one to two
minutes).
*[DR21620( GV)01/95] 2. Turn the air suspension switch on the right
side of the trunk to OFF.
*[DR21625( GV)01/95] 3. Measure the height of a reference point on
the front and rear bumpers at the center of
the vehicle.
*[DR21630( GV)01/95] 4. Attach trailer to vehicle and adjust the hitch
equalizer(s) so that the front bumper height
is 0 to 1/2 inch below the unloaded height.
After adjustment, the rear bumper should be
no higher than in step 3.
*[DR21635( GV)01/95] 5. Turn the air suspension switch ON.
*[DR21640( GV)01/95] RWARNING
Adjusting an equalizing hitch so the rear
bumper of the vehicle is lower or higher
than it was unloaded will defeat the
function of the load equalizing hitch and
may cause unpredictable handling.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
194
%*[DR21650( ALL)01/95]
Connecting the safety chains
*[DR21700( ALL)01/95] Always attach the trailer’s safety chains to your
vehicle. They help protect your trailer if the
hitch breaks.
*[DR21800( ALL)01/95] To connect the trailer’s safety chains:
*[DR21900( ALL)01/95] 1. Cross the chains under the trailer tongue
and attach them to your vehicle’s frame or
hook retainers. Never attach the safety
chains to your vehicle’s bumper. The bumper
is not designed to bear the weight of a
trailer.
*[DR22000( ALL)01/95] 2. Make sure that you leave enough slack in
the chains to allow you to turn corners.
*[DR22100( ALL)01/95] If you use a rental trailer, follow the instructions
that the rental agency gives you.
%*[DR22150( ALL)01/95]
Connecting the trailer’s brakes
*[DR22200( ALL)01/95] Electric brakes and manual, automatic, or
surge-type hydraulic brakes are safe if you
install them properly and adjust them according
to the manufacturer’s instructions. Be sure that
your trailer’s brakes meet local and federal
regulations.
[DR22250( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, provisions have been made
under the instrument panel for installation of an
electronic brake controller.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
195
*[DR22300( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not connect a trailer’s hydraulic brake
system directly to your vehicle’s brake
system. Your vehicle may not have
enough braking power and your chances
of having a collision greatly increase.
%*[DR22350( ALL)01/95]
Connecting the trailer’s lights
*[DR22400( ALL)01/95] Do not connect a trailer’s lighting system
wiring directly to your vehicle’s lighting system
wiring. To get the proper equipment for
hooking up your trailer’s lights, see your local
trailer dealer and your Ford dealer. Be sure to
follow their instructions carefully.
[DR22450( ALL)03/95] If your vehicle is equipped with the optional
trailer tow package, the proper lamp wiring and
equipment has been installed at the factory. The
trailer feed wire (supplied in a box in the
luggage compartment) needs a connector
compatible with your trailer prior to installation.
*[DR22500( ALL)01/95] If you do not install trailer lights correctly, you
may cause damage to the vehicle’s lighting
system.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
196
%*[DR22600( ALL)01/95] Driving While You Tow
*[DR22650( ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when driving while you
tow a trailer. Never drive faster than 45 mph
(70 km/h) when you tow in hilly country on
hot days. Also, anticipate stops so that you can
brake gradually.
*[DR22800( GV)01/95] When you tow down steep grades, move the
gearshift to 1 (Low). It gives more engine
braking to slow your vehicle than Drive on the
downgrades.
*[DR22900( GV)01/95] If you tow in D (Overdrive) while riding
through hilly country, your vehicle may
frequently shift between Overdrive and Third
gears. To prevent your vehicle from shifting too
much, press the Transmission Control Switch
located on the shift lever. This will also give the
engine more power going up hills and better
engine braking going down hills.
%*[DR23000( ALL)01/95] If you use the speed control while you are
towing on very long, steep grades, the speed
control may shut off.
*[DR23100( ALL)01/95]
Servicing your vehicle if you tow
*[DR23200( ALL)08/93] If you tow a trailer for a long distance, your
vehicle will need to be serviced more frequently
than usual. Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and
Record booklet for additional information.
File:rcdrv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:36:47 1996
197
Roadside Emergencies
%*[RE00400( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting Your Vehicle
*[RE00450( ALL)01/95] Your vehicle’s battery may die if you leave the
lights on or any electrical equipment on after
you turn the engine off. If this happens, you
may be able to jump-start from a booster battery
to start your vehicle.
*[RE00500( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
The gases around the battery can explode
if exposed to flames, sparks, or lit
cigarettes. An explosion could result in
injury or vehicle damage.
*[RE00600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
To protect yourself when charging a
battery, always shield your face and eyes.
Make sure that you can breathe fresh air.
%*[RE00700( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Applying too much pressure on the ends
when lifting a battery could cause acid to
spill. Lift the battery with a carrier or
with your hands on the opposite corners.
%*[RE00800( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Batteries contain sulfuric acid which burns
skin, eyes, and clothing.
*[RE00900( ALL)05/95] If the acid touches someone’s skin, eyes, or
clothing, immediately flush the area with water
for at least 15 minutes. If someone swallows the
acid, have him or her drink lots of milk or water
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
198
first, then Milk of Magnesia, a beaten egg, or
vegetable oil. Call a doctor immediately.
*[RE01000( ALL)03/95] To avoid damaging your vehicle or your battery,
and to avoid injury to yourself, follow these
directions for preparing your vehicle to
jump-start and connecting the jumper cables in
the order they are given. If in doubt, call for
road service.
*[RE01100( ALL)03/95] Preparing Your Vehicle
[RE01150( ALL)11/90] NOTE: also see label on battery.
*[RE01200( ALL)03/95] 1. Your vehicle has a 12-volt starting system, so
you need to use a 12-volt jumper system.
You will damage your starting motor,
ignition system, and other electrical parts if
you connect them to a 24-volt power supply
(either two 12-volt batteries in series or a
24-volt generator set).
*[RE01300( ALL)03/95] 2. Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled
vehicle. You could damage the vehicle’s
electrical system.
*[RE01400( ALL)04/95] 3. Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of
the disabled vehicle. Make sure the vehicles
do not touch each other. Set the parking
brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the
engine cooling fan and other moving parts.
*[RE01500( ALL)03/95] 4. Check all battery terminals and remove any
excessive corrosion before you attach the
jumper cables.
*[RE01600( ALL)02/95] 5. Turn on the heater fan in both vehicles.
Turning on the fan helps protect the
electrical system from voltage surges. Turn
off all other switches and lights in both
vehicles to prevent possible damage to either
vehicle’s electrical systems.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
199
%*[RE01700( ALL)05/95]
Connecting the jumper cables
*[RE01800( ALL)03/95] 1. Connect one end of the first jumper cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the discharged
battery. (You can connect either jumper cable
to the positive (+) terminal, as long as you
use the same cable for both positive
terminals.) Most jumper cables have a red
cable and a black cable. The red cable is
generally used for the positive terminals and
the black for the negative ones.
*[RE01900( ALL)04/95] 2. Connect the other end of the first cable to
the positive (+) terminal of the booster
battery.
*[RE02000( ALL)03/95] 3. Connect one end of the second cable to the
negative (s) terminal of the booster battery
— NOT to the discharged battery.
[RE02100( ALL)01/95] 4. Connect the other end of that cable to a
good metallic surface on the engine or frame
of the disabled vehicle making sure it is
clear of any rotating engine components. The
following illustrations show where you can
find a metallic surface.
*[RE02200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not connect the end of the second
cable to the negative (s) terminal of the
battery to be jumped. A spark may cause
an explosion of the gases that surround
the battery.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
200
[RE02700( GV)03/94]
full page art:0010336-F
The 4.6L SFI engine
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
201
*[RE02900( ALL)03/95] Jump-Starting
*[RE03000( ALL)03/95] 1. Make sure that the jumper cables are not in
the way of moving engine parts, then start
the booster vehicle. Run the engine at a
moderate speed.
*[RE03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Let the discharged battery charge for a few
minutes and then start the disabled vehicle.
It may take a couple of tries before the
vehicle starts. If the vehicle does not start
after several attempts, there may be a
different problem.
*[RE03200( ALL)03/95] 3. When both vehicles are running, let them
idle for a few minutes to charge the
discharged battery.
%*[RE03300( ALL)03/95]
Removing jumper cables
*[RE03400( ALL)03/95] 1. Always remove the jumper cables in the
reverse order. Remove the negative (s) end
of the jumper cable from the metallic surface
on the engine or frame of the disabled
vehicle.
*[RE03500( ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the negative (s) cable from the
booster battery.
*[RE03600( ALL)03/95] 3. Remove the positive (+) cable from the
booster battery.
*[RE03700( ALL)05/95] 4. Remove the other end of the positive (+)
cable from the discharged battery.
*[RE03800( ALL)04/95] After the vehicle is started, let it idle for a while
to let the engine “relearn” its idle conditions.
Drive it around for a while with all electrical
accessories turned off to let the battery recharge.
You may need to use a battery charger to fully
recharge the battery.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
202
%*[RE03900( ALL)03/95] Changing a Tire
*[RE04000( ALL)01/95] If you get a flat tire while you are driving, do
not apply the brake heavily. Instead, gradually
decrease the speed. Hold the steering wheel
firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the
side of the road. Park on a level spot, turn off
the ignition, set the parking brake, and turn on
the hazard flashers.
%*[RE04100( ALL)03/95] The Temporary Spare Tire
*[RE04200( GV)03/95] You may have a high pressure temporary spare
tire. This spare tire is smaller than a regular tire
and is designed for emergency use only. Use it
only when you get a flat tire and replace it as
soon as you can. This spare tire is marked with
the words “TEMPORARY USE ONLY” so that
you can easily identify it.
*[RE04250( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Extended use of other than
conventional spare tires on a
Traction-Lok rear axle could result in a
permanent reduction in effectiveness.
This loss of effectiveness does not
affect normal driving and should not
be noticeable to the driver.
*[RE04300( ALL)01/93] RWARNING
If you use the temporary spare tire
continuously or do not follow these
precautions, the tire could fail, causing
you to lose control of the vehicle, possibly
injuring yourself or others.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
203
*[RE04400( ALL)01/95] When you drive with the temporary spare tire,
DO NOT:
*[RE04500( ALL)01/95] ❑exceed 50 mph (80 km/h) under any
circumstances.
*[RE04600( ALL)01/95] ❑load your vehicle so that it is heavier than
the maximum vehicle load rating listed on
the tire decal.
*[RE04700( ALL)01/95] ❑tow a trailer.
*[RE04800( ALL)01/95] ❑use tire chains on this tire.
*[RE04900( ALL)01/95] ❑try to repair the temporary spare tire or
remove it from its wheel.
*[RE05000( ALL)01/95] ❑use the wheel for any other type of vehicle.
*[RE05100( ALL)01/95] ❑drive through an automatic car wash with
this tire. Because the temporary spare tire is
smaller than a conventional tire, it reduces
the ground clearance. Your vehicle may get
caught in the rails and it could be damaged.
% [RE05200( GV)11/94] Using the Conventional Spare Tire
(If equipped)
*[RE05300( GV)01/95] If you have the conventional spare tire, you can
use it as a spare or as a regular tire. This spare
tire is identical to the other tires that come with
your vehicle, although the wheel may not match.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
204
%*[RE05500( ALL)03/95] Spare Tire Location
[RE05600( ALL)11/90] The spare is stored in the trunk.
[RE06100( GV)03/94]
two third page art:0010341-H
The spare tire location
%*[RE06500( ALL)02/95] To remove the spare tire:
[RE06900( GV)12/91] 1. Lift off the spare tire cover (if equipped).
*[RE07000( GV)01/95] 2. Unscrew the wing-nut holding down the
spare tire.
[RE07100( GV)11/90] 3. Lift out the spare tire.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
205
%*[RE07300( ALL)03/95] Preparing to Change the Tire
*[RE07525( BCGV)03/95] 1. Make sure that your vehicle will not move
or roll. Put the gearshift in P (Park). Set the
parking brake and block the wheel that is
diagonally opposite the tire that you are
changing.
[RE07550( BCGV)05/95] When one of the back wheels is off the ground,
the transmission alone will not prevent the
vehicle from moving or slipping off the jack,
even if the vehicle is in P (Park). To prevent the
vehicle from moving when you change a tire, be
sure the parking brake is set, then block the
wheel (both directions) that is diagonally
opposite (other side and end of the vehicle) to
the tire being changed.
*[RE07560( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If the vehicle slips off the jack, you or
someone else could be seriously injured.
[RE07655( GV)12/94] Turn off the air suspension switch (if equipped)
prior to jacking.
*[RE07657( GV)05/95] RWARNING
On vehicles equipped with Air
Suspension, turn OFF the Air Suspension
switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing
your vehicle.
[RE07660( GV)05/92]
quarter page art:0010573-A
The air suspension switch — located in the trunk
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
206
*[RE07875( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To avoid injury, never run the engine
with one wheel off the ground, such as
when changing a tire.
*[RE07900( ALL)05/95] 2. Get out the spare tire and jack.
*[RE07960( GV)05/95] RWARNING
On vehicles equipped with Air
Suspension, turn OFF the Air Suspension
switch prior to jacking, hoisting or towing
your vehicle.
[RE08050( GV)06/92] 3. Remove any optional wheel covers or wheel
ornaments with the tapered end of a wheel
nut wrench. Insert the handle of the wrench
and twist it against the inner wheel cover
flange. For more about removing wheel
covers, see the information later in this
section.
*[RE08125( GV)01/95] 4. Loosen each wheel lug nut one-half turn
counterclockwise, but do not remove them
until the tire is raised off the ground. You
should pull up on the handle rather than
push to develop maximum force to loosen
wheel lug nuts.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
207
%*[RE08150( ALL)05/95] Removing and Replacing the Tire
[RE08300( GV)12/94] 1. Find the jacking location notches
(a depression on plastic moulding) near the
tire that you are changing. Align the two
tabs on jack with rectangular notch on sheet
metal. Slowly push jack straight until the
tabs are against the side of the frame. MAKE
SURE THE JACK IS PROPERLY
POSITIONED UNDER THE FRAME. Turn
the handle of the jack clockwise until the
wheel is completely off the ground.
*[RE08400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
To lessen the risk of personal injury, do
not put any part of your body under the
vehicle while changing a tire. Do not start
the engine when your vehicle is on the
jack. The jack is only meant for changing
the tire.
[RE08550( ALL)10/92]
half page art:0010759-A
The improper lift point
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
208
[RE08570( ALL)05/92] NOTE: Never use the differential housing as a
lift point.
% [RE08700( GV)11/90]
quarter page art:0010687-A
Jacking locations
[RE08725( GV)03/92]
quarter page art:0010688-A
Locating the notch for the jack — rear wheels
[RE08750( GV)03/92]
quarter page art:0010689-A
Locating the notch for the jack — front wheels
*[RE08900( ALL)01/95] 2. Turn the jack handle clockwise until the
wheel clears the ground. Remove the wheel
lug nuts.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
209
[RE08915( GV)01/96] 3. If you are replacing the front tire (with
aluminum wheels) with the temporary spare
tire, you need to remove the black dust
shield. Gently pull the shield over the rubber
o-rings and slide it off the wheel studs.
Because the rubber o-rings are soft, they
should pass through the holes in the shield.
If the rings do not pass through the holes,
remove them from the wheel studs. Save the
black dust shield for future use, and ensure
the rubber o-rings are removed from wheel
studs.
*[RE08925( GV)01/96] 4. Replace the flat tire with the spare tire,
making sure that the air valve stem is facing
outward.
*[RE08945( GV)01/96] 5. Reinstall the lug nuts, tightening until the
wheel is snug against the hub. The beveled
edges on the lug nuts face inward. Do not
fully tighten the lug nuts until you lower the
vehicle. If you do, you could force the
vehicle off the jack.
*[RE08966( GV)01/96] 6. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handle
counterclockwise.
*[RE08985( GV)01/96] 7. Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug
nuts in the order shown in the following
illustration. As soon as possible, have your
dealer or a qualified service technician check
the lug nuts for proper torque specifications.
% [RE09100( ALL)03/93]
quarter page art:0010350-A
The lug nuts on the wheel
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
210
[RE09450( GV)01/96] 8. Place any wheel covers and ornaments in the
trunk.
*[RE09550( GV)01/96] 9. Put the tire, jack, and wrench away. Make
sure the jack is securely fastened so it does
not rattle when you drive.
*[RE09650( GV)01/96] 10. Unblock the wheels.
[RE09675( GV)01/96] 11. Turn the air suspension ON (if so equipped).
[RE10000( GV)01/96]
Installation of the black dust shield
[RE10100( GV)01/96] When installing the regular tire, reinstall the
black dust shield by orienting and sliding the
shield until it is flush with the hub/rotor
assembly.
%*[RE11805( GV)01/95]
Aluminum wheel
[RE11806( GV)03/94]
half page art:0011501-A
The center wheel ornament
[RE11810( GV)05/93] Remove the center ornament from the wheel
with the tapered end of the wheel nut wrench
by inserting it under the notch, and rotating the
handle and then prying against the wheel.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
211
*[RE11815( GV)01/95] Install the center ornament on the wheel and be
sure it is snapped into place all the way around
using the palm of the hand or a rubber mallet.
[RE11835( GV)05/92]
Steel wheel with full wheelcover
[RE11837( GV)05/92]
half page art:0010615-C
Steel wheel with full wheelcover
[RE11838(M GV)03/93] Remove the wheelcover from the wheel using
the flanged end of the wheel nut wrench by
inserting the handle and then prying against the
inner wheelcover flange.
[RE11842(M GV)03/93] Install the wheelcover on the wheel with the
valve stem extension in the wheel matching the
hole in the wheelcover. Push by hand on the
outside edges of the wheelcover until it is
snapped firmly in place on the wheel.
[RE11850( GV)11/92] NOTE: DO NOT USE A STEEL HAMMER.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
212
[RE11900( GV)03/91] If you have the anti-theft locking spoked wheel
cover, each wheel cover has a lock bolt behind
the center hub ornament. You need a special key
wrench (stored in the glove box) to pry this
ornament off and to remove the lock bolt. Do
not lose this wrench or you will not be able to
remove the wheel cover.
[RE12000( GV)05/95] The key wrench has a registration number
attached to it. Keep the registration number in a
safe place. Complete the registration card and
return it to the manufacturer as soon as you buy
the vehicle. To replace the key wrench, send the
I.D. card to the manufacturer.
*[RE13800( ALL)02/95] If the Engine Cranks But Does
Not Start or Does Not Start After
a Collision
*[RE13810( ALL)04/95] The Fuel System Shut-off Switch
*[RE13900( ALL)03/95] If the engine cranks but does not start or if you
have had a collision, the fuel system shut-off
switch may have been triggered. The shut-off
switch is a device that stops the fuel system
when your vehicle has been involved in a
substantial jolt.
*[RE14000( ALL)01/95] For information on how to check and reset the
fuel system shut-off switch, see Fuel system
shut-off switch in the Index.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
213
%*[RE14100( ALL)05/95] Towing Your Vehicle
*[RE14201( ALL)05/95] If you need to have your vehicle towed, contact
a professional towing service or, if you are a
member, your roadside assistance center.
Recommended towing options include wheel lift
towing or flat bed towing.
*[RE14205( GV)01/96] Before your vehicle can be towed, the air
suspension switch in the luggage compartment
needs to be turned to the OFF position. It is
recommended that your Crown Victoria be
towed with wheel lift or flatbed equipment. If
slingbelt equipment must be used, the towbar
will deform the soft fascia (bumper). However, it
will return to an acceptable shape.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
214
*[RE14300( ALL)05/95]
three fourths page art:0001463-A
*[RE14400( ALL)05/95] When calling for a tow truck, tell the operator
what kind of vehicle you have. A towing
manual is available from Ford Motor Company
for all authorized tow truck operators. Have
your tow truck driver refer to this manual for
the proper hook-up and towing procedures for
your vehicle.
File:rcrev.ex
Update:Thu Feb 1 10:47:30 1996
215
Customer Assistance
%*[HS00205( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance
*[HS00210( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company has set up a 24-hour,
seven-day-a-week hotline with trained operators
that put you in touch with the help you need if
you experience a problem with your vehicle.
This complimentary service is provided to you
throughout your warranty period of 3
years/36,000 miles (3 years/60,000 km),
whichever comes first. To purchase Roadside
Assistance coverages beyond this period,
through Ford Auto Club, contact your Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer (not available in
Canada).
*[HS00215( ALL)06/94] Roadside Assistance will cover the following:
*[HS00220( ALL)06/94] ❑Mount your spare if you have a flat tire.
*[HS00225( ALL)06/94] ❑Jump-start your battery if it is dead.
*[HS00230( ALL)06/94] ❑Unlock your vehicle if you are locked out.
*[HS00235( ALL)06/94] ❑Bring you fuel if you run out.
*[HS00240( ALL)06/94] ❑Tow your vehicle if you are stranded. Even
non-warranty related tows, like accidents or
getting stuck in mud or snow, are covered
(some exclusions apply, such as impound
towing and repossession).
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
216
*[HS00245( ALL)06/94] How to use Roadside Assistance
*[HS00250( ALL)06/94] Your Roadside Assistance identification card can
be found in the Owner Guide portfolio in your
glove compartment. Complete the card and place
it in your wallet for quick reference.
*[HS00255( ALL)04/95] To receive roadside assistance in the United
States call 1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call
1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00260( ALL)04/95] Should you need to arrange for roadside
assistance yourself, Ford Motor Company will
reimburse the reasonable cost. To obtain
information about reimbursement call
1-800-241-FORD (in Canada call 1-800-665-2006).
*[HS00300( ALL)01/95] If You Have a Service Problem
*[HS00400( ALL)01/95] Ford Motor Company has authorized Ford and
Lincoln-Mercury dealerships that can service
your vehicle for you. This chapter tells you how
to get service or maintenance for your vehicle.
%*[HS00500( ALL)03/95] Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or
Canada)
*[HS00600( ALL)04/95] Ford recommends taking your vehicle to your
selling dealer who wants to ensure your
continued satisfaction. You may, however, take
your vehicle to any authorized Ford or
Lincoln-Mercury dealer. In most cases, your
dealer will be able to resolve your concern.
*[HS00700( ALL)04/95] If you are not satisfied with the service you
received from your dealership’s service
department, talk to the service manager at the
dealership, or if you still are not satisfied, talk to
the owner or general manager of the dealership.
In most cases, you will have your concern
resolved at this level.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
217
*[HS01000( ALL)03/95] If you are away from home when your vehicle
needs to be serviced, or if you need more help
than the dealer gave you, contact the Ford
Customer Assistance Center to find an
authorized dealership that may be able to help.
*[HS01025( ALL)04/95] In the U.S., contact:
%*[HS01050( ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0060100-E
*[HS01100( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or
concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
%*[HS01150( ALL)04/95]
one inch art:0060101-C
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
218
*[HS01200( ALL)04/95] Please have the following information available
when contacting Ford Customer Assistance:
*[HS01300( ALL)04/95] ❑your telephone number (both business and
home)
*[HS01400( ALL)04/95] ❑the name of the dealer and the city where the
dealership is located
*[HS01500( ALL)04/95] ❑the year and make of your vehicle
*[HS01550( ALL)04/95] ❑the date purchased
*[HS01600( ALL)03/95] ❑the current mileage on your vehicle
%*[HS01700( ALL)03/95] ❑your Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)
listed on your owner card and/or your
vehicle ownership license
[HS01800( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0010630-A
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN/Serial Number)
*[HS02200( ALL)03/95] If you still have a service or product complaint,
you may wish to contact the Dispute Settlement
Board (U.S. only) or the Canadian Motor Vehicle
Arbitration Plan (CAMVAP) in Canada.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
219
%*[HS02300( ALL)02/95] The Dispute Settlement Board
(U.S. Only)
*[HS02400( ALL)03/95] The Dispute Settlement Board is a voluntary,
independent dispute-settlement program
available free to owners or lessees of qualifying
Ford Motor Company vehicles.
*[HS02500( ALL)01/95] The Dispute Settlement Board may not be
available in all states. Ford Motor Company
reserves the right to change eligibility
limitations, modify procedures and/or to
discontinue this process at any time without
notice and without incurring obligations.
*[HS02600( ALL)01/95] What Kind of Cases Does the Board
Review?
*[HS02700( ALL)03/95] The Board reviews all product performance and
service complaints on Ford, Mercury and Lincoln
Cars and Ford and Mercury Light Trucks under
warranty that have not been resolved by a
dealer or Ford Motor Company.
*[HS02750( ALL)03/95] The Board does not review issues involving:
*[HS02800( ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford product
*[HS02900( ALL)01/95] ❑A non-Ford dealership
*[HS03100( ALL)01/95] ❑A vehicle sales transaction
*[HS03200( ALL)01/95] ❑A request for reimbursement of consequential
expenses unless incidental to a service or
product complaint being reviewed
*[HS03300( ALL)01/95] ❑Items not covered by your warranty
*[HS03400( ALL)01/95] ❑Alleged liability claims
*[HS03450( ALL)01/95] ❑Property damage where such damage is
significant when compared to the economic
loss alleged under the warranty dispute
*[HS03500( ALL)01/95] ❑Cases currently in litigation
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
220
*[HS03600( ALL)01/95] ❑Vehicles not used primarily for personal,
family, or household purposes
*[HS03650( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Complaints involving vehicles on
which applicable express written new
vehicle warranties have expired at
receipt of your application are not
eligible. Eligibility may differ
according to state law. For example, see
the unique brochure for California
purchasers/lessees.
*[HS03700( ALL)04/95] How Does the Board Work?
*[HS03800( ALL)04/95] The Board has four members:
*[HS03900( ALL)04/95] ❑three consumer representatives
*[HS04000( ALL)04/95] ❑a Ford or Lincoln-Mercury dealer
*[HS04200( ALL)04/95] Consumer candidates for Board membership are
recruited and trained by an independent
consulting firm. Dealers are chosen because of
their business leadership qualities.
*[HS04300( ALL)04/95] If the involved vehicle is within 36 months and
36,000 miles of the date of delivery (warranty
start date), you have a right to make an oral
presentation before the Board by indicating your
choice on the application. Also, oral
presentations may be requested by the Board. A
decision is made by the Board by simple
majority vote.
[HS04320( ALL)06/93] Board members review all the materials related
to each complaint and, based on the available
information, arrive at a fair and impartial
decision. Decisions are based on the written
statements and any oral presentations made by
each of the involved parties.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
221
*[HS04400( ALL)04/95] Because the Board usually meets only once a
month, some cases will take longer than 30 days
to be reviewed. The Board will make every
effort to resolve each case within 40 days after it
receives the customer application form.
*[HS04500( ALL)04/95] After your case has been reviewed, the Board
will mail you its decision in writing. It will also
provide you with a form to indicate your
acceptance or rejection of an award decision. The
decisions of the Board are binding on the dealer
and Ford, but customers may have other options
available to them under state or federal law.
*[HS04600( ALL)04/95] The decisions of the Board, however, may be
introduced into evidence by any party in
subsequent legal proceedings that may be
initiated.
*[HS04700( ALL)01/95] How Do You Contact the Board?
*[HS04800( ALL)04/95] Write to the Board at the following address to
request a brochure/application. You will be sent
a brochure and a one-page customer application
form. The form should be completed and mailed
to the same address.
*[HS04900( ALL)02/93]
one inch art:0060102-B
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
222
*[HS05100( ALL)04/95] What is the Review Process?
*[HS05200( ALL)04/95] Your application will be reviewed and if it is
determined to be eligible, you will receive an
acknowledgment indicating the file number
assigned to your application and the local Board
address. At the same time, your dealer and Ford
Motor Company representative are asked to
submit statements.
*[HS05300( ALL)04/95] To review your case properly, the Board needs
the following information:
*[HS05400( ALL)04/95] ❑legible copies of all documents and
maintenance or repair orders that relate to
the case
*[HS05500( ALL)04/95] ❑the year, make, model, and vehicle
identification number
*[HS05600( ALL)04/95] ❑the date you bought your vehicle
*[HS05700( ALL)04/95] ❑the date of repair and the mileage at the time
of repair
*[HS05800( ALL)04/95] ❑the current mileage
*[HS05900( ALL)04/95] ❑the name of the dealer who sold you the
vehicle or who serviced your vehicle
*[HS06000( ALL)04/95] ❑a brief description of your unresolved
complaint
*[HS06100( ALL)05/95] ❑a brief summary of actions that were taken
with the dealer and Ford Motor Company
*[HS06200( ALL)05/95] ❑the names (if known) of all people you
contacted at the dealership
*[HS06300( ALL)04/95] ❑a description of the action you want done to
resolve your concern.
*[HS06305( ALL)04/95] Should your application NOT qualify for review,
an explanation will be mailed to you.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
223
%*[HS07400( ALL)04/95] Reporting Safety Defects
(U.S. Only)
*[HS07500( ALL)01/95] If you believe that your vehicle has a defect
which could cause a crash or could cause injury
or death, you should immediately inform the
National Highway Traffic Safety Administration
(NHTSA) in addition to notifying Ford Motor
Company.
*[HS07600( ALL)01/95] If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may
open an investigation, and if it finds that a
safety defect exists in a group of vehicles, it may
order a recall and remedy campaign. However,
NHTSA cannot become involved in individual
problems between you, your dealer, or Ford
Motor Company.
*[HS07700( ALL)01/95] To contact NHTSA, you may either call the Auto
Safety Hotline toll-free at 1-800-424-9393 (or
366-0123 in the Washington, D.C. area) or write
to: NHTSA, U.S. Department of Transportation,
400 Seventh Street, Washington D.C. 20590. You
can also obtain other information about motor
vehicle safety from the Hotline.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
224
%*[HS08700( ALL)05/95] Ford of Canada Customer
Assistance
*[HS08800( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company of Canada, Limited
*[HS08900( ALL)03/95] If you live in Canada and have any questions or
concerns that the dealership cannot answer,
contact the Customer Assistance Centre.
*[HS09000( ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0060101-C
%*[HS09100( ALL)03/95] Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP)
*[HS09200( ALL)03/95] If a specific item of concern arises, where a
solution cannot be reached between a vehicle
owner, Ford of Canada, and/or one of its
dealers (that all parties can agree upon), the
owner may wish to use the services offered by
the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP).
[HS09300( ALL)05/95] CAMVAP uses the services of Provincial
Administrators to assist consumers in scheduling
and preparing for their arbitration hearings.
However, before you can proceed with
CAMVAP you must follow your manufacturer’s
dispute resolution process as outlined under
“Service/Maintenance Concerns (U.S. or
Canada)” earlier in this chapter.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
225
*[HS09400( ALL)05/95] Consumers wishing to obtain further information
about the program can obtain an information
booklet from your dealer or contact the
Provincial Administrator, Canadian Motor
Vehicle Arbitration Plan, at the address or
telephone number shown below.
*[HS09500( ALL)05/95] O & P Services
595 Bay Street — Suite 300
Toronto, Ontario
M5G 2C2
Telephone 1 (800) 207-0685
[HS09600( ALL)05/95] This plan is not available in the province of
Quebec.
%*[HS09700( ALL)05/95] Getting Help Outside the U.S.
and Canada
*[HS09800( ALL)05/95] Before you export your vehicle to a foreign
country, contact the appropriate foreign embassy
or consulate to make sure local regulations do
not prevent you from registering your vehicle.
Officials at the embassy can also help you decide
whether you should import your vehicle to that
country.
*[HS09900( ALL)05/95] Officials at the embassy or consulate can tell you
where to get unleaded fuel. If you cannot get
unleaded fuel or can get only fuel with an
anti-knock index that is lower than your vehicle
needs, contact a district or owner relations office
before you leave the U.S. or Canada.
*[HS10000( ALL)05/95] Use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without a
proper conversion may damage the effectiveness
of your emissions control system and may cause
engine knocking or serious engine damage. Ford
Motor Company is not responsible for any
damage that is caused by use of improper fuel.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
226
*[HS10100( ALL)05/95] You may also have difficulty importing your
vehicle back into the U.S. if you use leaded fuel.
*[HS10200( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle must be serviced while you are
traveling or living in Central or South America,
the Caribbean, or the Middle East, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, write to:
*[HS10300( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0060103-H
*[HS10400( ALL)05/95] If you are in other foreign countries, contact the
nearest Ford dealership. If the dealership cannot
help you, they can direct you to the appropriate
Ford affiliate office.
*[HS10500( ALL)05/95] If you buy your vehicle in North America and
then relocate outside of the U.S. or Canada,
register your Vehicle Identification Number and
new address with Ford Motor Company Export
Operations.
File:rchsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:46:57 1996
227
Accessories
*[AC00200( ALL)03/95] Ford Accessories for Your Vehicle
*[AC00240( ALL)04/95] Ford has many fine products available from
your dealer to clean your vehicle and protect its
finishes. For best results, use the following, or
products of equivalent quality:
*[AC00280( ALL)04/95]
fourteen pica chart:0001204-B
*[AC00300( ALL)04/95] A wide selection of accessories is available
through your local authorized dealer. These fine
accessories have been engineered specifically to
fulfill your automotive needs. They are custom
designed to complement the style and
aerodynamic appearance of your Ford-built
vehicle. In addition, each accessory is made from
high quality materials and meets or exceeds
Ford’s rigid engineering and safety specifications.
That is why Ford brand accessories are
warranted for up to 3 years or 36,000 miles
(60,000 km), whichever comes first. See your
dealer for complete warranty information and
accessory availability.
File:rcacv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:48:15 1996
228
*[AC00350( ALL)03/95] Safety, Comfort, and Convenience
[AC00460( GV)05/94]
fourteen pica chart:0010544-M
[AC00560( GV)03/95]
ten pica chart:0010545-N
*[AC01400( ALL)01/95] NOTE: When adding accessories, equipment,
passengers, and luggage to your
vehicle, do not exceed the total weight
capacity of the vehicle or of the front
or rear axle (GVWR, GAWR as shown
on the Safety Compliance Certification
Label). Consult your dealer for specific
weight information.
File:rcacv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:48:15 1996
229
[AC01500( ALL)05/95] NOTE: The Federal Communications
Commission (FCC) or in Canada the
Canadian Radio Telecommunications
Commission (CRTC) regulates the use
of mobile communications systems —
such as two-way radios, telephones,
and theft alarms — that are equipped
with radio transmitters. Any such
equipment installed in your vehicle
should comply with FCC regulation
and should be installed only by a
qualified technician.
*[AC01600( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Mobile communications systems may
harm the operation of your vehicle,
particularly if they are not properly
designed for automotive use or are not
properly installed. For example, when
operated, such systems may cause the
engine to stumble or stall. In addition,
such systems may themselves be
damaged or their operation affected by
operating your vehicle. (Citizens band
[CB] transceivers, garage door openers,
and other transmitters whose power
output is 5 watts or less will not
ordinarily affect your vehicle’s
operation.)
*[AC01700( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Because we have no control over the
installation, design, or manufacture of
such systems, Ford cannot assume
responsibility for any adverse effects or
damage that may result if you use this
equipment.
File:rcacv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:48:15 1996
230
% [AC03000( V)12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011332-A
File:rcacv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:48:15 1996
231
[AC03100( V)12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011333-A
File:rcacv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:48:15 1996
232
[AC03200( V)12/94]
thirty-six pica chart:0011334-A
File:rcacv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:48:15 1996
233
Servicing Your Crown
Victoria
%*[SV00300( ALL)03/95] Service Made Easy
*[SV00400( ALL)01/95] Ford has two goals for servicing your vehicle.
*[SV00550( ALL)01/95] 1. When we can, we design parts that do not
need to be serviced.
*[SV00600( ALL)01/95] 2. We want to make servicing your vehicle as
easy as possible. To help you:
*[SV00700( ALL)01/95] ❑We highlight do-it-yourself items in yellow in
the engine compartment so that you can find
them easily.
*[SV00800( ALL)01/95] ❑When possible, we design parts — such as
the headlamp bulbs — that can be replaced
without tools.
*[SV00900( ALL)05/94] ❑We give you a Maintenance Schedule that
makes tracking routine service for your
vehicle easy. The maintenance schedule is
located in the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet.
*[SV01000( ALL)01/95] This chapter tells you about the basic parts that
you need to check and service regularly.
*[SV01100( ALL)02/95] If your vehicle needs professional servicing, your
dealership can provide the parts and service
required. Check your Warranty Information Booklet
to find out which parts and services are covered.
Also see the Customer Assistance chapter of this
Owner Guide.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
234
*[SV01250( ALL)03/95] Ford Motor Company recommends that the
Owner Maintenance Checks listed in the
Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet be
performed for the proper operation of your
vehicle. In addition to the conditions listed in
the Owner Maintenance Checklist, be alert for any
unusual noise, vibration, or other indication that
your vehicle may need service. If you do notice
something unusual, see that your vehicle is
serviced promptly.
*[SV01275( ALL)03/95] Use only recommended fuels, lubricants, fluids,
and service parts conforming to Ford
specifications. Motorcraft parts are designed and
built to provide the best performance in your
vehicle. Using these parts for replacement is
your assurance that Ford-built quality stays in
your vehicle.
%*[SV01400( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
%*[SV01600( ALL)03/95] Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle
*[SV01700( ALL)01/95] Be especially careful when inspecting or
servicing your vehicle. Here are some general
precautions for your safety:
*[SV01900( ALL)03/95] ❑If you must work with the engine running,
avoid wearing loose clothing or jewelry that
could get caught in moving parts. Take
appropriate precautions with long hair.
*[SV02000( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not work on a vehicle in an enclosed
space with the engine running, unless you are
sure you have enough ventilation.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
235
*[SV02100( ALL)01/95] ❑Never get under a vehicle while it is
supported by a jack only. If you must work
under a vehicle, use safety stands.
*[SV02200( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all lit cigarettes and other smoking
materials away from the battery and all
fuel-related parts.
*[SV02800( ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine off:
*[SV03000( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park).
*[SV03100( ALL)03/95] 2. Remove the key from the ignition after you
turn the engine off.
*[SV03150( ALL)03/95] 3. Block the wheels. This will prevent your
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
*[SV03200( ALL)03/95]
Working with the engine on:
*[SV03400( BCGV)03/95] 1. Set the parking brake fully and make sure
that the gearshift is securely latched in
P (Park).
*[SV03501( ALL)03/95] 2. Block the wheels. This will prevent your
vehicle from moving unexpectedly.
*[SV03600( ALL)02/95] RWARNING
Do not start your engine with the air
cleaner removed and do not remove it
while the engine is running.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
236
%*[SV03650( ALL)03/95] Opening the Hood
[SV03800( ALL)03/95] 1. Inside the vehicle, pull the hood release
located under the lower left corner of the
instrument panel.
[SV03850( GV)03/94]
one third page art:0010175-C
The hood release under the instrument panel
[SV04000( ALL)03/95] 2. Go around to the front of the vehicle, and
release the auxiliary catch that is located
under the front edge of the hood at the
center of the vehicle.
[SV04050( GV)05/94]
one third page art:0010176-C
The auxiliary catch under the front edge of the hood
*[SV04200( BCGV)01/95] 3. Lift the hood until the counterbalanced
hinges hold it open.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
237
*[SV04400( BCGV)01/95] Whenever you close the hood, latch it securely.
*[SV04450( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Apply lubricant to the hood latch at
six-month intervals to maintain smooth
and trouble-free operation.
%*[SV04600( ALL)05/95] Engine Compartment
*[SV04800( GV)01/95] Your vehicle has a 4.6 liter engine. The following
page shows a diagram of where to find items
that you should regularly service.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
238
[SV05800( GV)05/95]
full page art:0010329-D
A 4.6 liter SFI engine
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
239
%*[SV05850( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Engine
*[SV06000( ALL)04/95] A clean engine is more efficient because a
buildup of grease and dirt acts as an insulator,
keeping the engine warmer than usual.
*[SV06020( ALL)05/95] ❑Extreme care must be used if a power washer
is used to clean the engine. The high pressure
fluid could penetrate sealed parts and
assemblies causing damage or malfunctions.
*[SV06040( ALL)04/95] ❑In order to avoid possible cracking of the
engine block or fuel injection pump, do not
spray a hot engine or injection pump with
cold water.
*[SV06060( ALL)04/95] ❑The alternator, distributor and air intake must
be covered. Covering these components will
help prevent water damage.
*[SV06080( ALL)04/95] ❑Never wash or rinse the engine while it is
running. Water getting into the engine may
cause internal damage.
%*[SV06100( ALL)03/95] Filling the Fuel Tank
*[SV06220( GV)01/95] The fuel filler door is outside the vehicle on the
driver’s side near the back. To fill the fuel tank:
[SV06550( ALL)05/95] 1. After opening the fuel filler door, remove
the cap carefully and slowly by turning it
counterclockwise 1/2 to 3/4 turn.
[SV06650( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
The fuel system may be under pressure. If
the fuel cap is venting vapor or if you
hear a hissing sound while disengaging
the fuel cap, wait until it stops before
completely removing the cap. Otherwise,
fuel may spray out and injure you or
others.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
240
[SV06700( ALL)05/95] 2. Put the nozzle all the way inside the fuel
filler pipe before pumping the fuel.
[SV06800( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you spill any fuel on the body of
your vehicle, clean it off immediately.
The fuel may dull or soften the paint
if you do not wash it off.
[SV06850( ALL)05/95] 3. Replace the fuel cap completely when you
are finished. Turn it clockwise 1/4 turn until
it is tight. It will click when it is fully
tightened.
[SV06875( ALL)05/95] 4. Push the fuel door closed.
[SV06900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
If you lose the fuel cap, replace it with a
Motorcraft or equivalent fuel cap. If you
do not use the proper fuel cap, the
pressure in the fuel tank can damage the
fuel system or cause it to work improperly
in a collision, endangering you and your
passengers.
[SV06950( ALL)05/95] NOTE: If you replace your fuel cap with an
aftermarket fuel filler cap, the customer
warranty may be void for any damage
to the fuel tank and/or fuel system.
[SV07500( ALL)05/95] Choosing the Right Fuel
[SV07600( ALL)05/95] Use only UNLEADED FUEL in your vehicle.
Using leaded fuel is prohibited by federal law.
Your warranty may not apply if your vehicle is
damaged because you used the wrong fuel.
[SV07701( ALL)05/95] Using a high-quality fuel makes your vehicle
more responsive and maintain its good fuel
economy and emissions. It should not be
necessary to add any aftermarket products to
your fuel tank if you continue to use a
high-quality fuel.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
241
[SV08750( ALL)05/95]
Octane recommendations
[SV08800( ALL)05/95] Your engine is designed to use fuel with an
octane rating of 87. In most cases it is not
necessary to use a fuel with an octane rating
higher than 87. At service stations, the octane
rating is displayed in a label on the pumps.
[SV08900( ALL)05/95]
one inch art:0060001-C
[SV09100( ALL)05/95] Using a fuel with a lower octane rating can
cause persistent and heavy knocking, which can
damage the engine.
[SV09200( ALL)05/95] Do not be concerned if your vehicle sometimes
knocks lightly when you drive up a hill or when
you accelerate. However, see your dealer or a
qualified service technician if persistent heavy
knocking occurs because this can damage the
engine.
[SV09350( ALL)05/95] If your vehicle has problems with starting, rough
idle or hesitation problems when the engine is
cold, it may be caused by fuel with low
volatility. Try a different brand of fuel. If the
condition persists, see your dealer or a qualified
service technician.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
242
[SV09800( ALL)05/95]
Gasolines for clean air
[SV09900( ALL)05/95] Fuels in certain areas of the country are required
to contain oxygenates to improve air quality.
Common oxygenates are ethanol or grain alcohol
(blended at no more than 10%), methanol or
wood alcohol (blended at no more than 5% with
cosolvents and additives), and MTBE or methyl
tertiary butyl ether (blended at no more than
15%).
[SV09950( ALL)05/95] Reformulated gasoline is also required in certain
areas of the U.S. These fuels are designed to
further reduce emissions from your vehicle.
[SV10000( ALL)05/95] Generally, you should not experience difficulties
operating your vehicle on fuels containing
oxygenates. We encourage you to use these
fuels.
[SV10185( ALL)05/95] Safety Information Relating to Automotive
Fuels
[SV10195( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Automotive fuels can cause serious injury
or death if misused or mishandled. To
minimize the risk that you will be
injured, please read the following
information carefully and observe the
recommended precautions.
[SV10197( ALL)05/95] ❑Turn vehicle off when refueling
[SV10199( ALL)05/95] ❑Do not smoke when refueling. Fuels are
extremely flammable.
[SV10201( ALL)05/95] ❑Do not siphon any fuel by mouth.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
243
[SV10205( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Gasoline or gasoline blended with
methanol can cause blindness and
possible death when swallowed. If any
fuel is swallowed, call a physician or
poison control center immediately.
[SV10209( ALL)05/95] ❑Avoid breathing vapors while refueling.
[SV10211( ALL)05/95] ❑If fuel is splashed on the skin, wash with
soap and water.
[SV10225( ALL)05/95] ❑If fuel is splashed in the eyes, remove contact
lenses (if worn), flush with water for 15
minutes, and seek medical attention.
[SV10227( ALL)05/95] Gasoline and gasoline blends may contain small
amounts of carcinogens, such as benzene.
Long-term exposure to unleaded gasoline vapors
has caused cancer in laboratory animals.
[SV10230( ALL)05/95] If you are taking the medication “Antabuse” or
other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of
alcoholism, vapor or skin contact with a
gasoline-methanol blend may cause the same
kind of adverse reaction as drinking an alcoholic
beverage. In sensitive individuals, serious
personal injury or sickness could result. Consult
a physician promptly if you experience an
adverse reaction.
[SV11300( ALL)05/95] Running Out of Fuel
[SV11350( ALL)05/95] NOTE: Avoid running out of fuel because this
situation may have an adverse effect on
modern powertrain components.
[SV11500( ALL)05/95] You may need to crank the engine several times
before the fuel system starts to pump fuel from
the tank to the engine.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
244
[SV11600( ALL)05/95] Calculating Fuel Economy
[SV11700( ALL)05/95] Fuel economy is an estimate of the efficiency of
your vehicle, and can be calculated as Miles Per
Gallon (MPG) or Liters Per 100 Kilometers
(L/100K).
[SV11750( ALL)05/95] Do not calculate fuel economy during your
vehicle’s break-in period. This would not be an
accurate estimate of how much fuel your vehicle
will normally use.
[SV11800( ALL)05/95] To calculate fuel economy:
[SV11900( ALL)05/95] 1. Fill the fuel tank completely and record the
initial odometer reading.
[SV12000( ALL)05/95] 2. Every time you buy fuel, record the
amount (in gallons or liters) purchased.
[SV12100( ALL)05/95] 3. After at least 3-5 tankfuls, fill the fuel tank
and record the final odometer reading.
[SV12200( ALL)05/95] 4. Use these equations to calculate your fuel
economy:
[SV12250( ALL)05/95] ❑English: MPG = (total miles driven) V
(gallons used)
[SV12275( ALL)05/95] ❑Metric: L/100k = (liters used) V
(100 kilometers)
[SV12300( ALL)05/95] Comparisons With EPA Estimates
[SV12400( ALL)05/95] EPA fuel economy figures are obtained from
laboratory tests under simulated road conditions
and may not reflect the actual conditions you
experience or your style of driving. The EPA
fuel economy estimate is not a guarantee that
you will achieve the fuel economy shown.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
245
[SV12650( ALL)05/95] The following decrease fuel economy:
[SV12700( ALL)05/95] ❑Lack of regular, scheduled maintenance
[SV12800( ALL)05/95] ❑Rapid acceleration and excessive speed
[SV12850( ALL)05/95] ❑Driving with your foot on the brake
[SV12900( ALL)05/95] ❑Sudden stops
[SV12950( ALL)05/95] ❑Extended engine idling
[SV13000( ALL)05/95] ❑Using speed control in hilly terrain
[SV13100( ALL)05/95] ❑Extended use of the A/C, defroster, rear
window defroster and other accessories
[SV13200( ALL)05/95] ❑Underinflated tires
[SV13300( ALL)05/95] ❑Heavy loads
[SV13400( ALL)05/95] ❑Aftermarket add-ons such as bike, ski or
luggage racks, bug deflectors, etc.
*[SV13510( ALL)02/95] Self-Service Pointers
*[SV13520( ALL)01/95] If you choose to do your own fueling, you
should also perform a few simple maintenance
routines. This extra effort will save you
additional money and contribute to the driving
efficiency of your vehicle.
*[SV13530( ALL)01/95] The following procedures require only a tire
gauge, a rag, an oil can spout and windshield
washer fluid.
*[SV13540( ALL)01/95] ❑Check the engine oil at every refueling stop
*[SV13550( ALL)01/95] ❑Clean the windshield, outside mirrors and
headlights
*[SV13560( ALL)01/95] ❑Check windshield washer fluid
*[SV13570( ALL)02/95] ❑Check tires for excessive wear or worn edges
*[SV13580( ALL)01/95] ❑Check the tire pressure at least monthly
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
246
%*[SV13600( ALL)03/95] Engine Oil Recommendations
*[SV13610( ALL)04/95] We recommend using Motorcraft oil or an
equivalent oil meeting Ford Specification
ESE-M2C153-E and displaying the American
Petroleum Institute CERTIFICATION MARK on
the front of the container.
*[SV13650( ALL)03/95]
one third page art:0060021-E
The API Certification Mark
*[SV13670( ALL)01/95] Never use:
*[SV13680( ALL)01/95] ❑“Non-Detergent” oils
*[SV13690( ALL)04/95] ❑Oils labeled API SA, SB, SC, SD, SE, SF or SG
%*[SV13700( ALL)01/95] ❑Additional engine oil additives, oil treatments
or engine treatments
%*[SV13702( ALL)03/95] Engine oils with an SAE 5W-30 viscosity are
PREFERRED for your vehicle. They provide the
best engine performance, fuel economy and
engine protection for all climates down to -15˚F
(-25˚C).
%*[SV13703( ALL)03/95] Synthetic engine oils which are CERTIFIED and
of the preferred viscosity may be used in your
engine. The engine oil and oil filter must still be
changed according to the maintenance schedule.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
247
%*[SV13775( ALL)01/95] Checking and Adding Engine Oil
*[SV13800( ALL)03/95] Since the proper amount of engine oil is
important for safe engine operation, check the oil
using the dipstick each time you put fuel in
your vehicle. Remember the engine must be off,
the oil must be warm and the vehicle must be
parked on level ground.
%*[SV13900( ALL)04/95] Checking the engine oil level:
*[SV14000( ALL)02/95] 1. Turn the engine off after it has warmed up
and allow a few minutes for the engine oil
to drain back into the oil pan.
*[SV14025( BCGV)03/95] 2. Set the parking brake, making sure the
gearshift is securely latched in P (Park).
*[SV14100( ALL)02/95] 3. Open the hood. Protect yourself from engine
heat.
*[SV14200( ALL)03/95] 4. Locate the engine oil dipstick (highlighted in
yellow) and carefully pull it out of the
engine.
*[SV14300( ALL)01/95] 5. Wipe the dipstick clean and put it back into
position, making sure it is fully seated.
[SV14400( GV)08/93]
one inch art:0000970-A
Engine oil dipstick
*[SV14500( ALL)03/95] 6. Carefully, pull the dipstick out again. If the
oil level is below the “ADD 1 QT” line, add
engine oil as necessary. If the oil level is
beyond the letter “F” in Full, engine damage
or high oil consumption may occur and
some oil must be removed from the engine.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
248
*[SV14600( ALL)01/95] 7. Put the dipstick back in and make sure it is
fully seated.
*[SV14800( ALL)01/95] It may be necessary to add some oil between oil
changes. Make sure you use a CERTIFIED
engine oil of the preferred viscosity. Your
vehicle’s warranty coverage may not apply if
engine damage is caused by the use of improper
engine oil.
*[SV15000( ALL)03/95] Add engine oil through the oil filler cap
highlighted in yellow. To add oil, remove the
filler cap and use a funnel to pour oil into the
opening. Be careful not to overfill the engine.
Recheck the oil level after you finish adding oil.
%*[SV16300( ALL)01/95] Changing the Engine Oil and the Oil Filter
*[SV16400( ALL)04/95] Change the engine oil and oil filter per the
following, whichever occurs first.
*[SV16500( ALL)04/95]
one third page art:0060618-C
*[SV16800( ALL)04/95] Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet for additional information.
%*[SV16900( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
249
*[SV17275( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Continuous contact with USED motor oil
has caused cancer in laboratory mice.
*[SV17285( ALL)05/95] Protect your skin by washing with soap and
water.
%*[SV17300( ALL)03/95] Engine Coolant
%*[SV17400( ALL)03/95] Checking the Engine Coolant
*[SV17500( ALL)01/95] NOTE: Be sure to read and understand
Precautions When Servicing Your
Vehicle at the beginning of this chapter.
*[SV17600( BCGV)05/95] RWARNING
The cooling fan is automatic and may
come on at any time. Always disconnect
the negative terminal of the battery before
working near the fan.
%*[SV17800( ALL)05/94] Your vehicle’s coolant protects your engine from
overheating in the summer and from freezing in
the winter. Check the level of the coolant at least
once a month. Simply look at the engine coolant
reservoir located in the engine compartment. To
locate the reservoir, see the diagram of your
vehicle’s engine under Engine Type, in this
chapter.
*[SV17850( ALL)05/95] The coolant additives also protect the entire
cooling system from internal passageway
corrosion and these additives lubricate the water
pump. The coolant should be serviced as noted
in the Maintenance Schedule and Record booklet.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
250
[SV18000( BCGV)05/94]
half page art:0010761-C
The engine coolant recovery reservoir
%*[SV18600( ALL)11/94]
Checking hoses
*[SV18700( ALL)11/94] Inspect all engine and heater system hoses and
hose connections for deterioration, leaks, and
loose hose clamps as specified in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet. Repair or replace
with Motorcraft hoses or equivalent as necessary.
*[SV18800( ALL)01/95]
Adding engine coolant
*[SV18900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not put engine coolant in the container
for the windshield washer fluid.
*[SV18950( ALL)05/95] If sprayed to clean the glass, engine coolant or
antifreeze could make it difficult to see through
the windshield.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
251
[SV19010( GV)05/95] RWARNING
Never remove the pressure cap while the
engine is running or hot.
[SV19030( ALL)05/95] Follow these steps to avoid personal injury that
can be caused by escaping steam or engine
coolant.
*[SV19060( GV)01/95] 1. Before you remove the cap, turn the engine
off and let it cool. Even when the engine is
cool, be careful when you remove the
pressure cap.
[SV19145( ALL)03/95] 2. When the engine is cool, wrap a thick towel
around the cap and turn it slowly
counterclockwise to unscrew.
*[SV19150( ALL)03/95] 3. Step back while the pressure releases.
[SV19160( ALL)12/94] 4. When you are sure that all the pressure has
been released, use the cloth to press the cap
down, turn it, and remove it.
*[SV19175( GV)02/95] 5. Stand away from the reservoir opening. Hot
steam may blow out or hot engine coolant
may even splash out.
*[SV19190( ALL)03/95] To find out how much engine coolant mixture
your vehicle’s coolant system can hold, see Refill
capacities for fluids in the Index.
% [SV19200( ALL)12/94] Add engine coolant only to the recovery
reservoir. If the coolant level is low, add a 50/50
or appropriate mixture of water and the type of
engine coolant that Ford specifies. You may add
water by itself only in an emergency, but you
should replace it with a 50/50 or appropriate
mixture as soon as possible.
*[SV19300( ALL)01/95] Have your dealer check the engine cooling
system for leaks if you have to add more than a
quart (liter) of engine coolant more than once a
month.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
252
*[SV19350( ALL)02/95] Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid is an
optimized formula that will protect all metals
and rubber elastomers used in Ford engines for
four years or 50,000 miles (80,000 km). It is not
necessary and not recommended to use
supplemental coolant additives in your gasoline
powered vehicle. These additives may harm
your engine cooling system. Follow the
recommended service interval for changing your
engine coolant.
*[SV19450( ALL)04/94] NOTE: When you change or add engine
coolant, it is important to maintain
your engine coolant concentration
between 40% (-11˚F [-24˚C]) and 60%
(-62˚F [-52˚C]), depending on your local
climate conditions. Below 40% you will
lose freeze protection and above 60%
your engine may overheat on a warm
day.
[SV19460( ALL)12/94] NOTE: The use of an improper coolant may
void your warranty for the engine
cooling system. Use only a premium
nationally recognized brand name
engine coolant. Do not use alcohol,
methanol antifreeze or engine coolant
mixed with alcohol or methanol
antifreeze. If you do not use the proper
coolant, the aluminum radiator on your
vehicle will corrode.
*[SV19470( ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company expressly authorizes the
Ford Rotunda engine coolant recycling process
and chemicals. Use only Ford Rotunda recycled
engine coolant or an equivalent recycled engine
coolant that is certified by the supplier to meet
Ford specification ESE-M97B44-A.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
253
%*[SV19480( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
*[SV19500( ALL)03/95] Use Ford Premium Cooling System Fluid
E2FZ-19549-AA (in Canada, Motorcraft CXC-8-B)
or an equivalent engine coolant that meets Ford
Specification ESE-M97B44-A.
*[SV19550( ALL)01/95] Leave the engine coolant in all year. Make sure
that the coolant will not freeze at the
temperature level in which you drive during
winter months. Keep a mixture of engine coolant
in your engine that has a protection rating of at
least -34˚F (-37˚C), or whatever protection rating
is appropriate for the climate in which you live.
%*[SV20100( ALL)04/95]
Engine coolant drain and flush
*[SV20200( ALL)11/94] Proper procedures for a complete coolant drain
and flush of the cooling system can be found in
the Car Service Manual. Following these
recommended procedures will ensure that the
specified coolant level and a 50/50 or
appropriate mixture of coolant and water is
maintained.
%*[SV20300( ALL)02/95]
Engine coolant refill procedure
*[SV20400( ALL)01/95] When the entire cooling system is drained and
refilled, the following procedure should be used
to ensure a complete fill:
*[SV20450( ALL)05/95] NOTE: It is imperative the following
procedure be adhered to. Failure to do
so could result in damage to your
engine.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
254
*[SV22014( ALL)03/95] ❑With the engine OFF and cool, remove the
pressure cap, located on the coolant reservoir.
Remove the heater hose and clamp, located
on the rear of the intake manifold.
*[SV22021( ALL)03/95] ❑Add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and
water to the coolant reservoir. Refer to Refill
Capacities later in this chapter for the correct
amount. Add coolant to the reservoir until
the coolant continuously flows out of the tube
in the rear of engine. Reattach hose and
secure clamp.
[SV22026( ALL)03/95] ❑Continue to fill the reservoir until the coolant
is at the FULL COLD level.
*[SV22031( ALL)05/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap to the fully
installed position.
*[SV22036( ALL)05/95] ❑Start and idle the engine until the radiator
upper hose is warm (this indicates the
thermostat is open and coolant is flowing
through the entire system).
*[SV22041( ALL)03/95] ❑Immediately shut off the engine and let cool.
Cautiously remove the pressure relief cap and
add a 50/50 mixture of specified coolant and
water until the coolant is at the COLD FILL
level in the coolant reservoir.
*[SV22046( ALL)03/95] ❑Reinstall the pressure cap securely.
*[SV22050( ALL)03/95] ❑Check for leaks at the draincock.
*[SV22055( ALL)03/95] ❑Recheck the engine coolant level, using the
recommended procedure, after one or two
occasions of vehicle use.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
255
%*[SV22090( ALL)03/95] Battery
*[SV22100( ALL)02/95] Your vehicle may have a Motorcraft
maintenance-free battery. When the original
equipment battery is replaced under warranty, it
may be replaced by a Motorcraft
Low-Maintenance Battery.
*[SV22130( ALL)02/95] The Low-Maintenance Battery has removable
vent caps for checking the electrolyte level and
for adding water, if necessary. The electrolyte
level should be checked at least every 24 months
or 24,000 miles (40 000 km) in temperatures up
to 90˚F (32˚C) and more often in temperatures
above 90˚F (32˚C). Keep the electrolyte level in
each cell up to the level indicator. Do not
overfill.
*[SV22145( ALL)02/95] If the level gets low, you can add tap water to
the battery, provided the water isn’t hard or
doesn’t have a high mineral or alkali content.
However, if possible you should refill the battery
with distilled water. If the battery needs water
quite often, have the charging system checked
for a possible malfunction.
%*[SV22160( ALL)03/95] Help Us Protect Our Environment
*[SV22175( ALL)04/95] Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that
used lead-acid batteries be returned to an
authorized recycling facility for disposal.
*[SV22190( ALL)03/95]
one inch art:0000983-A
Battery recycling symbol
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
256
%*[SV22194( BCGV)03/95] Because your vehicle’s engine is electronically
controlled by a computer, some control
conditions are maintained by power from the
battery. If you ever disconnect the battery or
install a new battery, you must allow the
computer to “relearn” its idle conditions before
your vehicle will drive properly. To let the
engine do this, put the gearshift in P (Park), turn
off all the accessories, and start the vehicle. Let
the engine idle for at least one minute. (Engine
must be warm in order to “learn.”) Also, allow
approximately 10 miles (16 km) of stop and go
traffic for your vehicle’s engine to completely
“relearn” its idle.
%*[SV22200( ALL)03/95] Windshield Washer Fluid and
Wipers
%*[SV22250( ALL)03/95] Washer Fluid
[SV22300( ALL)12/94] Check the level of the windshield washer fluid
periodically, or when the optional lamp indicates
low fluid. The reservoir for washer fluid is
located on the driver’s side of the engine
compartment. Visual inspection can determine if
the washer fluid is adequate. Do not operate the
washer when the reservoir is empty.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
257
[SV23150( GV)03/93]
half page art:0010474-B
The reservoir for the windshield washer fluid
*[SV23400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not put windshield washer fluid in the
container for the engine coolant.
%*[SV23500( ALL)01/95] Use specially formulated windshield washer
fluid rather than plain water, because specially
formulated washer fluids contain additives that
dissolve road grime. For safety reasons, washer
fluids containing an appropriate antifreeze such
as methanol should be used in freezing weather
(temperatures below 32˚F [0˚C]). State or local
regulations on Volatile Organic Compounds
(VOC’s) may restrict use of the most common
antifreeze, methanol. Washer fluids containing
non-methanol antifreeze agents should be used
only if they provide cold weather protection
without damaging the vehicle’s paint finish,
wiper blades, and windshield washer system.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
258
%*[SV23600( ALL)03/95] Wiper Blades
*[SV23700( ALL)03/95] Check the windshield wiper blades at least twice
a year. Also check them whenever they seem
less effective than usual. Substances such as tree
sap and some hot wax treatments used by
commercial car washes reduce the effectiveness
of wiper blades.
*[SV23800( ALL)03/95] If the blades do not wipe properly, clean both
the windshield and the wiper blades. Use
undiluted windshield washer solution or a mild
detergent. Rinse thoroughly with clear water. Do
not use fuel, kerosene, paint thinner, or other
solvents to clean your wiper blades. These will
damage your blades.
*[SV23900( ALL)03/95] To make reaching the wiper blades easy, simply
turn the ignition to the ACC position and turn
your wipers on. Wait for them to reach a
vertical position and turn the ignition to the OFF
position. Do not move the wipers manually.
Manually moving the wipers across the
windshield may damage them.
*[SV24000( ALL)03/01]
Wiper blade replacement
*[SV24100( ALL)03/95] If the wiper blades still do not work properly
after you clean them, you may need to replace
the wiper blade assembly or the blade element.
When replacing the wiper blade assembly, blade
refill, or wiper arm always use a Motorcraft part
or equivalent. To replace the blades, follow the
instructions that come with them.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
259
%*[SV24200( ALL)03/95] Tires
*[SV24300( ALL)03/95] Look at your tires each time you fill your fuel
tank. If one tire looks lower than the others,
check the pressure in all of them. Always follow
these precautions:
*[SV24500( ALL)03/95] ❑Keep your tires inflated to the recommended
pressures.
*[SV24600( ALL)02/95] ❑Stay within the recommended load limits (see
Load limits in the Index).
*[SV24700( ALL)02/95] ❑Make sure the weight of your load is evenly
distributed.
*[SV24800( ALL)10/89] ❑Drive at safe speeds.
*[SV24900( ALL)01/95] If you do not take these precautions, your tires
may fail or go flat.
*[SV24950( ALL)05/95] Ford Motor Company recommends obeying
posted speed limits.
*[SV25000( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Driving too fast for conditions creates the
possibility of loss of vehicle control.
Driving at very high speeds for extended
periods of time may result in damage to
vehicle components.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
260
%*[SV25200( ALL)05/95] At least once a month, check the pressure in all
your vehicle’s tires, including the spare. Use an
accurate tire pressure gauge. Check the tire
pressure when tires are cold, after the vehicle
has been parked for at least one hour or has
been driven less than 3 miles (5 km). You can
find proper cold pressure and load limits of
recommended size tires on the Safety
Compliance Certification Label.
*[SV25400( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Improperly inflated tires can affect vehicle
handling and can fail suddenly, possibly
resulting in loss of vehicle control.
%*[SV25500( ALL)02/95] Tire Rotation
*[SV25600( ALL)04/95] Because your vehicle’s front and rear tires
perform different jobs, they often wear
differently. To make sure your tires wear evenly
and last longer, rotate them as indicated in the
following diagram.
*[SV25700( ALL)01/95] For tire rotation intervals, see the Maintenance
Schedule. If you notice that the tires wear
unevenly, have them checked.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
261
[SV26200( GV)05/89]
two third page art:0010381-B
Rotating the tires
[SV26350( GV)03/94] NOTE: Use the five tire rotation only when
the conventional spare wheel is the
same as the road wheels. (Do not mix
the steel wheel with aluminum wheels
in tire rotation sequence.)
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
262
%*[SV26500( ALL)04/95] Replacing the Tires
*[SV26600( ALL)01/95] Replace any tires that show wear bands. When
your tire shows a wear band, it has only
1/16 inch (2 mm) of tread left.
% [SV26700( ALL)05/94]
one inch art:0001318-A
A worn-out tire
*[SV26800( ALL)01/95] Because your vehicle’s tires may wear unevenly,
you may need to replace them before a wear
band appears across the entire tread. Some spots
wear more heavily than others.
*[SV26850( ALL)01/95] RWARNING
When replacing full size tires, never mix
radial, bias-belted, or bias-type tires. Use
only the tire sizes that are listed on the
tire pressure decal. Make sure that all tires
are the same size, speed rating, and
load-carrying capacity. Use only the tire
combinations recommended on the decal.
If you do not follow these precautions,
your vehicle may not drive properly and
safely.
*[SV27100( ALL)01/95] Tires that are larger or smaller than your
vehicle’s original tires may also affect the
accuracy of your speedometer.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
263
%*[SV28100( ALL)02/95] Information About Tire Quality Grades
*[SV28200( ALL)01/95] New vehicles are fitted with tires that have their
Tire Quality Grade (described below) molded
into the tire’s sidewall. These Tire Quality
Grades are determined by standards that the
United States Department of Transportation has
set.
*[SV28250( ALL)01/95] Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic
tires for use on passenger cars. They do not
apply to deep tread, winter-type snow tires,
space-saver or temporary use spare tires, tires
with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or
limited production tires as defined in Title 49
Code of Federal Regulations Part 575.104(c)(2).
*[SV28300( ALL)01/95] U.S. Department of Transportation — Tire
quality grades: The U.S. Department of
Transportation requires Ford to give you the
following information about tire grades exactly
as the government has written it.
%*[SV28399( ALL)01/95] Treadwear
*[SV28400( ALL)01/95] The treadwear grade is a comparative rating
based on the wear rate of the tire when tested
under controlled conditions on a specified
government test course. For example, a tire
graded 150 would wear one and one-half (1 1/2)
times as well on the government course as a tire
graded 100. The relative performance of tires
depends upon the actual conditions of their use,
however, and may depart significantly from the
norm due to variations in driving habits, service
practices and differences in road characteristics
and climate.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
264
*[SV28499( ALL)01/95] Traction A B C
*[SV28500( ALL)01/95] The traction grades, from highest to lowest, are
A, B, and C, and they represent the tire’s ability
to stop on wet pavement as measured under
controlled conditions on specified government
test surfaces of asphalt and concrete. A tire
marked C may have poor traction performance.
Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tire
is based on braking (straightahead) traction tests
and does not include cornering (turning)
traction.
*[SV28599( ALL)01/95] Temperature A B C
*[SV28600( ALL)01/95] The temperature grades are A (the highest), B,
and C, representing the tire’s resistance to the
generation of heat and its ability to dissipate
heat when tested under controlled conditions on
a specified indoor laboratory test wheel.
Sustained high temperature can cause the
material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire
life, and excessive temperature can lead to
sudden tire failure. The grade C corresponds to
a level of performance which all passenger car
tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle
Safety Standard No. 109. Grades B and A
represent higher levels of performance on the
laboratory test wheel than the minimum
required by law. Warning: The temperature
grade for this tire is established for a tire that is
properly inflated and not overloaded. Excessive
speed, underinflation, or excessive loading, either
separately or in combination, can cause heat
buildup and possible tire failure.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
265
%*[SV28700( ALL)04/95] Snow Tires and Chains
*[SV28800( BCGV)01/95] The tires on your vehicle have all-weather treads
that provide traction in rain or snow. However,
during the winter months in some climates, you
may need to use snow tires and occasionally
chains for your tires.
*[SV28900( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Snow tires must be the same size and
grade as the tires you currently have on
your vehicle.
*[SV29000( ALL)02/95] Use chains on the tires only in an emergency or
if the law requires them where you live. If you
choose to use chains on your vehicle’s tires, be
aware of the following:
*[SV29100( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure the chains are the right size for
your tires. Use only SAE Class “S” chains.
Other types may damage your vehicle.
*[SV29200( ALL)01/95] ❑Put the chains on tightly with the ends held
down securely. Verify that no chain touches
any wiring, brake lines, or fuel lines. Follow
the chain manufacturer’s instructions.
*[SV29300( ALL)01/95] ❑Drive slowly. If you can hear the chains rub
or bang against your vehicle, stop the vehicle
and tighten the chains. If you continue to
hear the chains rub or bang against your
vehicle, remove the chains to prevent damage
to your vehicle.
*[SV29400( ALL)10/94] ❑Avoid fully loading your vehicle if possible.
*[SV29500( ALL)05/94] ❑Remove tire chains at the first opportunity
after using them on snow and ice. Do not use
the chains on dry roads.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
266
%*[SV29600( ALL)04/95] Cleaning the Wheels
*[SV29700( ALL)05/95] Wash the wheels with the same detergent you
use to wash your vehicle’s body. Do not use
acid-based wheel cleaners, steel wool, abrasives,
fuel, or strong detergents. These substances will
damage protective coatings. Use tar and road oil
remover to remove grease and tar.
*[SV29800( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Before going to a car wash, find out if
the brushes are abrasive.
%*[SV30450( ALL)01/95] Automatic Transmission Fluid
*[SV30475( ALL)01/95] Under normal circumstances, you do not need to
check the fluid level of the transmission, since
your vehicle does not use up transmission fluid.
Refer to the Maintenance Schedule and Record
booklet for replacement intervals. However, if
the transmission is not working properly — for
instance, the transmission may slip or shift
slowly, or you may notice some sign of fluid
leakage — the fluid level should be checked.
%*[SV30550( ALL)02/95] Checking the Automatic Transmission
Fluid
*[SV30560( ALL)02/95] It is preferable to check the transmission fluid
level at normal operating temperature
150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), after approximately
20 miles (30 km) of driving. However, if
necessary, you can check the fluid level without
having to drive 20 miles (30 km) to obtain a
normal operating temperature if outside
temperatures are above 50˚F (10˚C).
[SV30575( ALL)03/94] With the vehicle on a level surface, start the
engine and, while fully applying the brake
pedal, move the transmission shift selector
through all of the gear ranges allowing sufficient
time for each position to engage. Securely latch
the transmission shift selector in the P (Park)
position, fully set the parking brake and leave
the engine running.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
267
[SV30601( GV)03/93] NOTE: Your vehicle should not be driven if
the fluid level is below the bottom
hole on the dipstick.
*[SV30650( ALL)02/95] Wipe off the dipstick cap, pull the dipstick out
and wipe the indicator end clean. Put the
dipstick back into the filler tube and make sure
it is fully seated. Pull the dipstick out and read
the fluid level.
*[SV30701( GV)01/95] When checking fluid at normal operating
temperatures 150˚F-170˚F (66˚C-77˚C), the fluid
level should be within the crosshatched area on
the dipstick. When the vehicle has not been
driven, and outside temperatures are above 68˚F
(20˚C), the fluid levels should be between the
holes on the dipstick.
*[SV30715( ALL)01/95] NOTE: If the vehicle has been operated for an
extended period at high speeds or in
city traffic during hot weather, or
pulling a trailer, the vehicle should be
turned off for about 30 minutes to
allow the fluid to cool before checking.
%*[SV30725(M CGV)05/95] Adding Automatic Transmission Fluid
[SV30750( ALL)03/94] Before adding any fluid, be sure that the correct
type will be used. Use only MERCONHfluid.
*[SV30775( ALL)03/95] Add fluid in 1/2 pint (.25L) increments through
the filler tube to bring the level to the correct
area on the dipstick. DO NOT OVERFILL. If the
level is above the top hole on the dipstick,
excess fluid should be removed by a qualified
technician.
%*[SV30801( ALL)04/95] NOTE: Always dispose of used automotive
fluids in a responsible manner. Follow
your community’s standards for
disposing of these types of fluids. Call
your local recycling center to find out
about recycling automotive fluids.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
268
[SV30850( GV)10/94]
one third page art:0010384-E
Detail of the automatic transmission dipstick
%*[SV31900( ALL)03/95] Brake Fluid
*[SV32000( ALL)04/95] Under normal circumstances, your vehicle
should not use up brake fluid rapidly. However,
expect the level of the brake fluid to slowly fall
as you put more mileage on your vehicle and
the brake lining wears.
[SV32200( BCGV)03/95] Check the brake fluid at each scheduled engine
oil change or at least once a year. You can do
this by looking at the fluid level in the plastic
reservoir on the master cylinder. Also, see label
on reservoir cap. (To locate the master cylinder,
see The Engine Types in the Index.) The fluid
level should be between the MIN and MAX
marks.
*[SV32350( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Brake fluid is toxic.
*[SV32375( ALL)05/95] If brake fluid contacts eyes, flush eyes with
running water for 15 minutes. Get medical
attention if irritation persists. If taken internally,
drink water and induce vomiting. Get medical
attention immediately.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
269
*[SV32400( ALL)03/95] If the fluid is low, carefully clean and remove
the cap from the reservoir. Fill the reservoir to
the MAX line with Ford High Performance
DOT 3 Brake Fluid C6AZ-19542-AA,
C6AZ-19542-BA, or equivalent DOT 3 fluid
meeting Ford specification ESA-M6C25-A.
*[SV33100( ALL)01/95] RWARNING
If you use a brake fluid that is not
DOT 3, you will cause permanent damage
to your brakes.
*[SV33200( ALL)01/95] Do not fill the reservoir above the MAX line.
[SV33300( GV)10/90]
one third page art:0010385-A
The brake fluid reservoir
*[SV33700( ALL)01/95] If you find that the fluid level is excessively low
— below the seam or ridge on the outside of the
plastic reservoir — have the brake system
inspected.
*[SV33750( ALL)01/95] RWARNING
Do not let the reservoir for the master
cylinder run dry. This may cause the
brakes to fail.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
270
%*[SV34800( ALL)03/95] Power Steering Fluid
*[SV34900( ALL)01/95] Check the level of the power steering fluid at
least twice a year (i.e., every Spring and Fall).
%*[SV35000( ALL)03/95] Checking and Adding Power Steering
Fluid
*[SV35100( ALL)02/95] 1. Start the engine and let it run until the
power steering fluid reaches normal
operating temperature. The power steering
fluid will be at the right temperature when
the engine coolant temperature gauge in the
instrument cluster is near the center of the
NORMAL operating temperature range.
*[SV35200( ALL)01/95] 2. While the engine idles, turn the steering
wheel back and forth several times. Make
sure that the cap assembly is installed at this
time.
*[SV35300( ALL)05/95] 3. Turn the engine off.
*[SV35420( GV)11/94] 4. Check the fluid level in the power steering
fluid reservoir. The fluid level should be
between the MIN and MAX lines on the side
of the reservoir.
*[SV35550( GV)11/94] 5. If the power steering fluid is below the MIN
mark, add fluid in small amounts until the
level is between the MIN and MAX lines on
the side of the reservoir.
[SV35650( GV)12/94] 6. When you are finished, put the cap assembly
back on the reservoir.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
271
[SV35750( GV)12/94]
half page art:0010657-C
Fluid level for power steering
[SV35875(M GV)03/95] Use only power steering fluid that meets Ford
Specification MerconHATF XT-2-QDX.
*[SV35900( ALL)01/95] If the power steering fluid is low, do not drive
your vehicle for a long period of time before
adding fluid. This can damage the power
steering pump.
[SV36150( GV)03/93] If you must check the power steering fluid when
it is cold, make sure that the fluid reaches the
MIN mark on the reservoir.
% [SV36280( GV)12/94] Fuses, High Current Fuses, Fuse
Links, and Circuit Breakers
*[SV36400( ALL)03/95] Fuses (conventional and high current) and circuit
breakers protect your vehicle’s wiring system
from overloading. If electrical parts in your
vehicle are not working, the system may have
been overloaded and blown a fuse or tripped a
circuit breaker. Before you replace or repair any
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
272
electrical parts, check the appropriate fuses
(conventional and high current) or circuit
breakers.
*[SV36600( ALL)03/95] The following charts tell you which fuses or
circuit breakers protect the wiring for each
electrical part of your vehicle. If a fuse blows or
a circuit breaker opens a circuit, all the parts of
your vehicle that use that circuit will not work.
*[SV36610( ALL)01/95] Once you have determined which fuses or circuit
breakers to check, follow the procedures under
Checking and replacing fuses or Checking and
replacing circuit breakers in this chapter.
[SV37400( GV)03/93]
half page art:0011155-B
The instrument panel fuse panel
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
273
%*[SV37500( ALL)02/95] The Instrument Panel Fuses, Circuit
Breakers and Relays
[SV38400( V)03/95]
thirty-two pica chart:0010395-K
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
274
[SV38500(V)03/95]
thirty-sixpicachart:0
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
275
%*[SV39000( ALL)01/95] High Current Fuses
*[SV39200( ALL)01/95] High current fuses are circuit protectors that are
part of the wiring harness for some electrical
equipment. These, like fuses, open when the
circuit load exceeds their amperage rating. High
current fuses may be purchased from your Ford
or Lincoln-Mercury dealer.
[SV39500( GV)06/94] The high current fuse panel is located in the
engine compartment near the battery.
*[SV39600( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Always disconnect the battery before
servicing high current fuses.
*[SV39700( ALL)05/95] Ford recommends that high current fuses be
replaced by a qualified technician.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
276
% [SV40100( ALL)06/93]
The high current fuse panel
[SV40550( V)03/94]
full page art:0011381-A
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
277
[SV40600(ALL)06/93]
Thehighcurrentfusesandrelays
[SV41203(V)05/95]
twenty-fourpicachart
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
278
[SV41204(V)05/95]
eighteenpicachart:0011382-
%*[SV41210(ALL)03/95] CheckingandReplacingFuses
*[SV41215(ALL)02/95] Ifyouneedtocheckafuse,followthesesteps:
[SV41230(GV)03/93] 1. Findthefusepaneltotheleftofthesteering
column.Removethefusepanelcoverto
exposethefusepanel.
[SV41245(BCGV)03/93] 2. Checkthefusetoseeifitisblown.Look
throughtheclearsideofthefusetoseeif
themetalwireinsideisseparated.Ifitis,
thefuseshouldbereplaced.
[SV41550(ALL)05/92]
quarterpageart:0010416-A
Thesideviewofafuse
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
279
[SV41600( GV)01/93] 3. Replace the fuse with one that has the right
amperage rating. (See the following charts.)
[SV41900( ALL)05/95]
eight pica chart:0001092-B
[SV41910(M GV)01/94]
six pica chart:0001093-B
*[SV42500( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Always replace a fuse with one that has
the specified amperage rating. Using a
fuse with a higher amperage rating can
cause severe wire damage and could start
a fire.
[SV42700( GV)12/91] 4. Replace the lower steering column finish
panel.
*[SV42800( ALL)01/95] Even after you replace a fuse, it will continue to
blow if you do not find what caused the
overload. If the fuse continues to blow, have
your electrical system checked.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
280
%*[SV42900( ALL)03/95] Circuit Breakers
*[SV43000( ALL)01/95] If you need to check a circuit breaker that is on
the fuse panel, see Checking and replacing fuses in
this chapter to find out how to locate the fuse
panel.
[SV43200( ALL)12/94] Circuit breakers will reset themselves and allow
the electrical parts to work again once the
overload on the circuit is removed. If the circuit
breakers continue to cut off electricity, have your
vehicle’s electrical system checked.
*[SV43250( ALL)02/95] Diagnostic equipment is needed to check circuit
breakers. Refer to the manufacturer’s
instructions.
*[SV43300( ALL)02/95] If you replace a circuit breaker, use one with the
same amperage rating. To remove a circuit
breaker mounted in the fuse panel, grip it with
your finger and thumb and pull it straight out
of its socket.
*[SV43800(M GV)02/95] Since the circuit breaker for the headlamps is
mounted in the headlamp switch, you must
replace the entire switch to install a new circuit
breaker.
[SV43900( GV)06/93] Fuse Links
[SV43950( GV)03/93] Fuse links are circuit protectors that are part of
the wiring harness for some electrical equipment.
These, like fuses, open when the circuit lead
exceeds their amperage rating. Fuse links may be
purchased from your Ford or Lincoln-Mercury
dealer. See the following charts to find out
which electrical parts are protected by a fuse
link.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
281
[SV43970( GV)03/93]
ten pica chart:0010407-D
%*[SV44400( ALL)03/95] Lights and Bulb Replacement
*[SV44500( ALL)01/95] It is a good idea to check the operation of the
following lights frequently:
*[SV44600( ALL)01/95] ❑headlamps
*[SV44700( ALL)01/95] ❑tail lamps
*[SV44800( ALL)01/95] ❑brakelamps
*[SV44900( ALL)01/95] ❑hazard flasher
*[SV44950( ALL)02/95] ❑high-mount brakelamp
*[SV45000( ALL)01/95] ❑turn signals
*[SV45100( GV)01/95] ❑side markers
*[SV45200( ALL)01/95] ❑license plate lamp
%*[SV45600( ALL)01/95] The alignment of your headlamps should be
checked if:
*[SV45700( ALL)01/95] ❑oncoming motorists frequently signal you to
turn off your vehicle’s high beams when you
do not have the high beams on
*[SV45800( ALL)01/95] ❑the headlamps do not seem to give you
enough light to see clearly at night
*[SV45900( ALL)01/95] ❑the headlamp beams are pointed substantially
away from a position slightly down and to
the right
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
282
%*[SV46000( ALL)03/95] Headlamp Bulb
*[SV46100( ALL)01/95] The headlamps on your vehicle use replaceable
bulbs. When the lamp burns out, simply replace
the bulb, rather than the whole lamp.
*[SV46200( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefully
and keep out of children’s reach. Grasp
the bulb only by its plastic base and do
not touch the glass. The oil from your
hand could cause the bulb to break the
next time the headlamps are operated.
*[SV46300( ALL)01/95] Do not remove the burned-out bulb unless you
can immediately replace it with a new one. If a
bulb is removed for an extended period of time,
contaminants may enter the headlamp housing
and affect its performance.
[SV46500( GV)05/95]
one third page art:0010432-B
Headlamp bulb removal
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
283
*[SV46600( ALL)03/95]
Removing the headlamp bulb
*[SV46700( ALL)01/95] 1. Make sure that the headlamp switch is in
the OFF position.
*[SV46810( GV)01/95] 2. Lift the hood, open access panel above
headlamp and find the bulb in the headlamp
socket.
*[SV47000( GV)01/95] 3. Remove the electrical connector by pulling
off the bulb base.
*[SV47150( GV)01/95] 4. Remove the bulb by turning it 1/4 of a turn
to free it from the socket.
*[SV47400( ALL)03/95]
Installing the headlamp bulb
*[SV47500( GV)01/95] 1. Insert the glass envelope of the bulb into the
socket while aligning the locking tabs.
*[SV47700( GV)01/95] 2. Rotate the bulb 1/4 turn to lock.
*[SV47900( ALL)02/95] 3. Push the electrical connector into the rear of
the plastic base until it snaps, locking it into
position.
*[SV48050( GV)01/95] 4. Close the access panel.
%*[SV48370( BCGV)02/95] High-Mount Brakelamp Bulbs
[SV48380( BCGV)06/94] Your vehicle has a brakelamp mounted in the
rear window, called a high-mount brakelamp.
You may need to remove this lamp at times to
replace the brakelamp bulb or to clean the rear
window.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
284
[SV48700( GV)03/92]
half page art:0010436-B
Parts of the high-mount brakelamp
% [SV48900( BCGV)06/94] To remove the high-mount brakelamp:
[SV49400( GV)06/94] 1. Remove the two retaining screws with a
Phillips screwdriver.
[SV49800( GV)10/90] 2. Then lift the whole assembly up and over
the retaining brackets. Do not move upper
part of plastic attachment brackets.
[SV50010( GV)06/94] 3. Twist socket counterclockwise to remove
from lamp.
[SV50020( GV)06/94] 4. Pull bulb out of socket.
[SV50250( GV)06/94] 5. Replace the burned out bulbs.
*[SV50300( BCGV)02/95] To install the high-mount brakelamp:
[SV50600( GV)10/90] 1. Position the brakelamp over the retaining
brackets.
[SV50900( GV)01/89] 2. Install and tighten the two retaining screws.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
285
%*[SV51600( ALL)10/92] Using the Right Bulbs
[SV52100( V)03/95]
thirty pica chart:0010442-I
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
286
%*[SV52400( ALL)03/95] Emission Control System
*[SV52500( ALL)05/95] Your vehicle is equipped with a catalytic
converter which enables your vehicle to comply
with applicable exhaust emission requirements.
*[SV52550( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Exhaust leaks may result in the entry of
harmful and potentially lethal fumes into
the passenger compartment. Under
extreme conditions excessive exhaust
temperatures could damage the fuel
system, the interior floor covering, or
other vehicle components, possibly
causing a fire.
*[SV52600( ALL)05/95] To make sure that the catalytic converter and the
other emission control parts continue to work
properly:
*[SV52700( ALL)01/95] ❑Use only unleaded fuel.
*[SV52800( ALL)01/95] ❑Avoid running out of fuel.
*[SV52900( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not turn off the ignition while your
vehicle is moving, especially at high speeds.
*[SV52950( ALL)01/95] ❑Do not push start your vehicle.
*[SV53000( ALL)03/95] ❑Have the services listed in the Maintenance
Schedule and Record booklet performed
according to the specified schedule. The
scheduled maintenance services are required
because they are considered essential to the
life and performance of your vehicle and to
its emissions system.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
287
*[SV53075( ALL)03/95] In general, maintenance, replacement, or service
of the emissions control devices or systems in
your new Ford Motor Company vehicle or
engine may be performed at your expense by
any automotive repair establishment or
individual using automotive parts equivalent to
those which your vehicle or engine was
originally equipped.
*[SV53150( ALL)05/95] Ford strongly recommends the use of genuine
Ford replacement parts. If other than Ford or
Motorcraft parts or Ford authorized
remanufactured parts are used for maintenance
replacements or for the service of components
affecting emissions control, such non-Ford parts
should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor
Company parts in performance and durability. It
is the owner’s responsibility to determine the
equivalency of such parts. Please consult your
warranty booklet for complete warranty
information.
*[SV53175( ALL)05/95] RWARNING
Do not park, idle, or drive your vehicle in
dry grass or other dry ground cover. The
emission system heats up the engine
compartment and exhaust system, which
can start a fire.
*[SV53200( ALL)05/95] Watch for fluid leaks, strange odors, smoke, loss
of oil pressure, the charge warning light, the
check engine light, or the temperature warning
light. These sometimes indicate that the emission
system is not working properly.
*[SV53300( ALL)01/95] Do not make any unauthorized changes to your
vehicle or engine. Changes that cause more
unburned fuel to reach the exhaust system can
increase the temperature of the engine or
exhaust system.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
288
*[SV53400( ALL)01/95] By law, anyone who manufactures, repairs,
services, sells, leases, trades vehicles, or
supervises a fleet of vehicles is not permitted to
intentionally remove an emission control device
or prevent it from working. In some of the
United States and in Canada, vehicle owners
may be liable if their emission control device is
removed or is prevented from working.
*[SV53500( ALL)02/92] Never use a metal exhaust collector when you
service your vehicle. If the metal collector
contacts any of your vehicle’s plastic trim or
bumper parts they could melt or deform.
*[SV53600( ALL)01/95] Do not drive your vehicle if it does not operate
properly. See your dealer if the engine runs on
for more than five seconds after you shut it off
or if it misfires, surges, stalls, or backfires.
%*[SV53700( ALL)02/95] Information about your vehicle’s emission
control system is on the Vehicle Emission
Control Information decal located on or near the
engine. This decal identifies engine displacement
and gives some tune-up specifications.
%*[SV53702( ALL)05/95] Readiness for Inspection/Maintenance
Testing
*[SV53715( ALL)05/95] In some localities it may become a legal
requirement to pass an
Inspection/Maintenance (I/M) test of the
On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) II system. If the
vehicle’s powertrain system or its battery has
just been serviced, the OBD II system is reset to
a not ready for I/M testing condition. To
prepare for I/M testing, the law specifies a
“need for additional mixed city and highway
driving to complete the check” of the OBD II
system. As soon as all of the OBD II system
checks are successfully completed, the OBD II
system is set to the ready condition. The amount
of driving required to reach the ready condition
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
289
varies with individual driving patterns. To
complete this requirement in the minimum
amount of time, refer to the OBD II Drive Cycle
defined below. If the vehicle owner cannot or
does not want to do the additional driving
required by law, a service center can perform
this drive cycle as it would any other type of
repair work.
*[SV53717( ALL)05/95] OBD II Drive Cycle
[SV53730( ALL)03/95] The following steps must be run in the order
shown. If steps 2 thru 9 are interrupted, repeat
the preceding step. Any safe driving mode is
acceptable between steps.
*[SV53735( ALL)03/95] Always drive vehicle in safe manner according
to traffic conditions and obey all traffic laws.
*[SV53740( ALL)05/95] The engine must be warmed up and at
operating temperature before proceeding with
the drive modes of the following OBD II Drive
Cycle.
*[SV53745( ALL)05/95] 1. Start the engine. Drive or idle (in neutral)
the vehicle for 4 minutes.
*[SV53747( BCGV)05/95] 2. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
*[SV53752( BCGV)05/95] 3. Accelerate the vehicle to 45 mph (72 km/h)
at 1/4 to 1/2 throttle for 10 seconds.
*[SV53757( BCGV)05/95] 4. Drive the vehicle with a steady throttle at
45 mph (72 km/h) for 30 seconds.
*[SV53763( BCGV)05/95] 5. Idle the vehicle in drive for 40 seconds.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
290
*[SV53768( BCGV)05/95] 6. Continue to drive the vehicle in city traffic at
speeds between 25 and 40 mph
(40-64 km/h) for 15 minutes. During the 15
minute drive cycle the following modes must
be achieved:
*[SV53772( ALL)05/95] a. at least 5 stop and idle modes at 10
seconds each
*[SV53775( ALL)05/95] b. acceleration from idles at 1/4 to 1/2
throttle position, and
*[SV53777( ALL)05/95] c. choose 3 different speeds to do 1.5
minute steady state throttle drives.
*[SV53780( BCGV)05/95] 7. Accelerate the vehicle up to between 45 and
60 mph (72-97 km/h). This should take
approximately 5 minutes.
*[SV53784( BCGV)05/95] 8. Drive vehicle and hold the throttle steady at
the selected speed between 45 and 60 mph
(72-97 km/h) for approximately 5 minutes.
*[SV53788( BCGV)05/95] 9. Drive the vehicle for 5 minutes at varying
speeds between 45 and 60 mph
(72-97 km/h).
*[SV53792( BCGV)05/95] 10. Bring the vehicle back to idle. Idle in drive
for 40 seconds.
*[SV53796( ALL)05/95] 11. OBD II drive cycle has been completed.
Vehicle can be turned off when convenient.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
291
*[SV53800(ALL)03/95] RefillCapacities,MotorcraftParts,
andLubricantSpecifications
%*[SV53900(ALL)03/95] RefillCapacities
[SV54300(GV)03/95]
twenty-twopicachart:0
*[SV54550(ALL)03/95] NOTE:Rearaxlelubequantitiesmustbe
replacedevery100,000miles
(160,000km)oriftheaxlehasbeen
submergedinwater.Otherwise,the
lubeshouldnotbecheckedorchanged
unlessaleakissuspectedorrepair
required.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
292
*[SV54600(ALL)01/95] MotorcraftParts
[SV54900(GV)03/94]
fourteenpicachart:0010453
[SV55000(ALL)09/94] Ifasparkplugisremovedforexamination,it
mustbereinstalledinthesamecylinder.
[SV55100(ALL)05/95]
For4.6L(2V)engines:
[SV55125(ALL)05/95] Cylinders#1,#2,#3,#4haveaPGsuffix.
[SV55150(ALL)05/95] Cylinders#5,#6,#7,#8haveaPsuffix.
[SV55200(ALL)03/95] Ifasparkplugneedstobereplaced,useonly
sparkplugswiththeservicenumbersuffixletter
asshownontheenginedecal.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
293
%*[SV55300( ALL)03/95] Lubricant Specifications
[SV56000( GV)05/95]
thirty pica chart:0010586-R
*[SV56400( ALL)03/95] NOTE: Rear axle lube quantities must be
replaced every 100,000 miles
(160,000 km) or if the axle has been
submerged in water. Otherwise, the
lube should not be checked or changed
unless a leak is suspected or repair
required.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
294
%*[SV57000( ALL)01/95] Vehicle Storage
*[SV57100( ALL)01/95] Maintenance Tips
*[SV57150( ALL)01/95] If you plan on storing your vehicle for an
extended period of time (60 days or more), refer
to the following maintenance recommendations
to ensure your vehicle stays in good operating
condition.
*[SV57200( ALL)01/95]
General
*[SV57300( ALL)01/95] ❑Store all vehicles in a dry, ventilated place.
*[SV57400( ALL)01/95] ❑Protect from sunlight, if possible.
*[SV57500( ALL)01/95] ❑If vehicles are stored outside, they require
regular maintenance to protect against rust
and damage.
*[SV57600( ALL)01/95]
Body
*[SV57700( ALL)01/95] ❑Wash vehicle thoroughly to remove dirt,
grease, oil, tar or mud from exterior surfaces,
rear wheel housing and underside of front
fenders.
*[SV57800( ALL)01/95] ❑Periodically wash vehicles stored in exposed
locations.
*[SV57900( ALL)01/95] ❑Touch-up raw or primed metal to prevent
rust.
*[SV58000( ALL)01/95] ❑Cover chrome and stainless steel parts with a
thick coat of auto wax to prevent
discoloration. Re-wax as necessary when the
vehicle is washed.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
295
*[SV58100( ALL)04/95] ❑Lubricate all hood, door and trunk lid hinges
and latches with a light grade oil.
*[SV58200( ALL)01/95] ❑Cover interior soft trim to prevent fading.
*[SV58300( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep all rubber parts free from oil and
solvents.
%*[SV58350( ALL)01/95]
Engine
*[SV58400( ALL)01/95] ❑Start engine every 15 days. Run at fast idle
until it reaches normal operating temperature.
*[SV58500( ALL)01/95] ❑With your foot on the brake, shift through all
the gears while the engine is running.
%*[SV58600( ALL)01/95]
Fuel system
*[SV58700( ALL)07/94] ❑Fill fuel tank with high-quality unleaded fuel
until the first automatic shutoff of the fuel
pump nozzle.
*[SV58900( ALL)03/95] NOTE: During extended periods of vehicle
storage (60 days or more), fuel may
deteriorate due to oxidation. This can
damage rubber and other polymers in
the fuel system and may also clog
small orifices.
*[SV59000( ALL)01/95] Ford Gas Stabilizer should be added whenever
actual or expected storage periods exceed 60
days. Follow the instructions on the label. The
vehicle should then be operated at idle speed to
circulate the additive throughout the fuel system.
%*[SV59200( ALL)01/95]
Cooling system
*[SV59300( ALL)01/95] ❑Protect against freezing temperatures.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
296
%*[SV59400( ALL)01/95]
Battery
*[SV59500( ALL)01/95] ❑Check and recharge as necessary.
*[SV59600( ALL)01/95] ❑Keep connections clean and covered with a
light coat of grease.
*[SV59650( ALL)03/95] ❑If storing your vehicle for more than 30 days
without recharging the battery, it may be
advisable to disconnect the battery cables to
ensure battery charge is maintained for quick
starting.
[SV59675( ALL)05/94] NOTE: If battery cables are disconnected, it
will be necessary to reset memory
features.
%*[SV59700( ALL)01/95]
Brakes
*[SV59800( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure brakes and parking brake are fully
released.
%*[SV59900( ALL)01/95]
Tires
*[SV60000( ALL)05/95] ❑Maintain recommended air pressure.
*[SV60100( ALL)01/95]
Miscellaneous
*[SV60200( ALL)01/95] ❑Make sure all linkages, cables, levers and
clevis pins under vehicle are covered with
grease to prevent rust.
*[SV60300( ALL)03/95] ❑Move vehicles at least 25 feet (8 m) every 15
days to lubricate working parts and prevent
corrosion.
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
297
[SV06/95]
full page chart:FORDADPLN
File:rcsvv.ex
Update:Wed Jun 28 16:02:20 1995
303
[QI03150( GV)06/95]
full page art:0011380-A
Label Locations
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
304
[QI03300( V)05/95]
full page art:0011128-C
Front Exterior View
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
305
[QI03500( V)05/95]
full page art:0011130-D
Rear Exterior View
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
306
[QI03600( V)05/95]
full page art:0011132-C
Entrance View
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
307
[QI03800( V)05/95]
full page art:0011134-D
Driver’s Door
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
308
[QI04000( V)05/95]
full page art:0011136-D
Instrument Panel
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
309
[QI04200( V)05/95]
full page art:0011138-C
Instrument Cluster — Mechanical
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
310
[QI04280( V)05/95]
full page art:0011202-C
Instrument Cluster — Electronic
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
311
[QI04400( V)05/95]
full page art:0011140-D
Trunk
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
312
[QI04500( V)05/95]
full page art:0011141-D
4.6L Engine Compartment
File:rcqiv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:38:47 1996
Index 313
Index
A
ABS warning light
(see Anti-lock brake system) ..... 50,84
Accessory position on the ignition ..... 37
Accessory power source,
power point outlet .......... 144
Additives, engine oil .......... 246
Air bag supplemental restraint system
description ............... 17
disposal ................ 24
driver air bag ............. 17
indicator light ........... 52,68
operation ............... 20
proper seating ............. 18
tone generator ............. 24
wearing safety belts........... 17
Air cleaner filter, location ........ 237
Air conditioning
electronic automatic temperature
control system ............ 90
manual heating and air conditioning
system ............... 88
Air suspension
description .............. 184
see also Rear air suspension system . . 184
Alarm, activating remote personal .... 130
Aluminum wheels............ 210
Antenna, radio
(see Electronic sound system) ..... 155
Antifreeze (see Engine coolant) ...... 249
Anti-lock brake system (ABS)
description .............. 181
see also Brake ............ 181
warning light............ 50,84
Ashtray(s) ............... 143
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
314 Index
Assistance (see Customer assistance).... 215
Audio system
(see Electronic sound system) ..... 149
Automatic transmission
driving an automatic overdrive..... 173
fluid, adding ............. 267
fluid, checking ............ 266
fluid, refill capacities ......... 291
fluid, specification........... 293
Axle, traction lok ............ 178
B
Backing up ............... 175
Basic vehicle warranty ........... 3
Battery
acid, treating emergencies ....... 197
battery saver ............. 128
charging system warning light .... 52,69
disconnecting ............. 256
how to service ............ 255
jumping a disabled battery....... 197
maintenance-free ........... 255
proper disposal, recycling ....... 255
replacement, specifications ....... 292
voltage gauge..............60
when storing your vehicle ....... 296
Black dust shield ............ 210
Brake fluid
brake warning light ......... 49,85
specifications ............. 293
Brakelamp
bulb replacement ........... 285
high-mount brakelamp ........ 283
Brakes
adjustment .............. 181
anti-lock ............... 181
anti-lock brake system
(ABS) warning light........ 50,84
applying the brakes .......... 181
brake warning light ......... 49,85
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 315
Brakes (continued)
fluid, checking and adding ...... 268
fluid, specifications .......... 293
front disc .............. 181
new brake linings............ 4
noise ................ 182
parking ............... 182
trailer ................ 194
when storing your vehicle ....... 296
Brake-shift interlock ........... 174
Break-in period .............. 4
Bulbs, replacing
headlamps .............. 282
specifications ............. 285
C
Canada, customer assistance ....... 224
Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan
(CAMVAP).............. 224
Capacities for refilling fluids ....... 291
Carbon monoxide in exhaust........ 43
Car seats for children
(see Child safety seats) ......... 26
Cassette tape player
(see Electronic sound system) . . . 149, 161
Catalytic converter ........... 286
Chains, tires .............. 265
Changing a tire ............. 202
Charging system gauge .......... 60
Charging system warning light..... 52,69
Childproof locks ............ 121
Child safety restraints ........... 24
child safety belts ............ 35
child safety seats ............ 26
Child safety seats
and air bags ............ 19,26
automatic locking mode (retractor) .... 28
in front seat .............. 28
in rear outboard seat .......... 28
in rear center seat ........... 34
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
316 Index
Chime
key in ignition .............38
safety belt ............. 51,65
Circuit breakers
checking and replacing ........ 280
see also fuses ............. 271
Cleaning your vehicle
chrome and aluminum parts ....... 6
engine compartment.......... 239
exterior ................ 5
exterior lamps ............ 103
fabric ................ 139
headlamps .............. 103
instrument panel ............88
instrument panel lens ......... 108
interior lamps............. 107
mirrors................ 141
plastic parts .............. 6
polishing ................ 6
rustproofing .............. 6
safety belts ...............17
tail lamps .............. 103
upholstery and interior trim ...... 139
washing ................ 5
wheels ................ 266
Climate control system
air conditioning........... 88,90
electronic automatic temperature
control................90
heating............... 88,90
Clock.................. 108
Cold engine starting ............40
Coolant (see Engine coolant)
checking and adding ......... 249
drain and flush ............ 253
preparing for storage ......... 295
proper solution ............ 251
refill capacities ............ 291
refill procedure ............ 253
specifications ............. 293
temperature gauge ......... 58,64
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 317
Cruise control (see Speed control) .... 116
Cupholder(s) .............. 143
Customer Assistance Center, Ford (U.S.). . 217
Customer Assistance Centre,
Ford of Canada............ 217
D
Dashboard (see Instrument panel) ..... 87
Daytime running light system ...... 102
Defrost
rear window ............. 101
windshield ............. 89,98
Dipstick, automatic transmission fluid. . . 267
Dispute Settlement Board ........ 219
Doors
door ajar warning message ....... 82
lubricant specifications ........ 293
Driving under special conditions
bad weather ............. 186
heavy load.............. 188
high water .............. 187
slippery roads ............ 186
towing a trailer............ 190
Dust shield, black ............ 210
E
Electrical system
circuit breakers ............ 280
fuses ................ 271
power point outlet .......... 144
Electronic message center
(see Message center) .......... 74
Electronic sound system
antenna ............... 155
radio reception ............ 169
tuning the radio ......... 151, 162
warranty and service information . . . 172
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
318 Index
Emergencies, roadside
assistance............... 215
battery acid spills ........... 197
jump-starting ............. 197
towing ................ 213
Emergency brake (parking brake) ..... 182
Emission control system, catalytic
converter............... 286
Engine
check engine warning light ..... 55,66
does not start..............41
fuel injected engine, starting .......39
fuel system shut-off switch........45
preparing to start ............39
service points............. 237
starting.................40
starting after a collision .........45
storing your vehicle .......... 295
Engine block heater ............42
Engine coolant
checking and adding ......... 249
checking hoses ............ 250
disposal ............... 253
preparing for storage ......... 295
proper solution ............ 251
recovery reservoir........... 249
refill capacities ............ 291
specifications ............. 293
Engine coolant temperature gauge
description ............. 58,64
electronic................64
mechanical ...............59
Engine oil
changing oil and oil filter ....... 248
checking and adding ......... 247
dipstick ............... 247
disposal ............... 248
engine oil pressure gauge ........61
engine oil pressure warning light.....69
filter, specifications .......... 292
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 319
Engine oil (continued)
refill capacities ............ 291
specifications ............. 293
synthetic oil ............. 246
“break-in” oils ............. 5
viscosity ............... 246
Entry system
illuminated.............. 123
keyless................ 123
remote................ 128
Exhaust fumes .............. 43
Extended Service Plan, Ford ........ 4
F
Federal Communications Commission. . . 171
Flashers, hazard............. 113
Flashing the lights............ 110
Flat tire ................ 202
Floor mats ............... 147
Fluid refill capacities .......... 291
Ford Customer Assistance Center..... 217
Ford Dispute Settlement Board ...... 219
Ford Extended Service Plan ........ 4
Ford Motor Company of Canada ..... 224
Ford of Canada Customer
Assistance Centre........... 224
Foreign registration ........... 225
French owner guides, how to obtain .... 3
Fuel
capacity ............... 291
filling your vehicle with fuel...... 239
filter, specifications .......... 292
fuel gauge ............. 58,71
storing your vehicle.......... 295
Fuel and distance computer
average economy ............ 77
english/metric button .......... 75
fuel remaining ............. 72
instantaneous economy ......... 78
reset button .............. 75
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
320 Index
Fuel and distance computer (continued)
select button ..............75
to empty indicator ...........76
trip distance ..............79
trip/reset button ............79
Fuel cap, removing ........... 239
Fuel filter, specifications ......... 292
Fuel gauge .............. 58,71
Fuel system shut-off switch, starting after a
collision ................45
Fuse panels
engine compartment.......... 275
high current fuse panel ........ 276
instrument panel ........... 271
Fuses
charts ................ 273
checking and replacing ........ 278
circuit breakers ............ 280
G
Gas cap (see Fuel cap) .......... 239
Gasoline (see Fuel)............ 239
Gauges, Electronic
engine coolant temperature gauge ....64
fuel gauge ...............71
odometer................73
speedometer ..............73
Gauges, Mechanical
battery voltage gauge ..........60
engine coolant temperature gauge ....58
engine oil pressure gauge ........61
fuel gauge ...............58
odometer................60
speedometer ..............60
trip odometer..............60
GAWR (Gross Axle Weight Rating)
calculating .............. 189
definition............... 188
location ............... 188
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 321
Gearshift
automatic operation.......... 173
column-mounted ........... 175
positions............... 173
shift-lock............... 174
GVWR (Gross Vehicle Weight Rating)
calculating .............. 189
definition .............. 188
location ............... 188
H
Hazard flashers ............. 113
Headlamps
autolamp system ........... 104
bulb specification ........... 285
checking alignment .......... 281
cleaning ............... 103
daytime running lights ........ 102
flashing ............... 110
high beam .............. 110
replacing bulbs ............ 281
turning on and off .......... 103
Head restraints ............. 133
Heated mirrors ............. 142
Heating
electronic automatic temperature
control system ............ 90
manual heating and air
conditioning system ......... 88
High beams, indicator light ...... 54,66
High-mount brakelamp
description .............. 283
replacing the bulb .......... 284
Hitch ................. 192
Hood
latch location............. 236
lubrication specifications........ 293
release lever ............. 236
Horn.................. 114
Hoses, checking............. 250
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
322 Index
I
Identification Number, Vehicle (VIN) . . . 218
Idle
relearning .............. 256
speed .................41
Ignition
chime .................38
positions of the ignition .........37
removing the key ............38
Infant seats (see Safety seats) ........26
Instrument cluster
electronic................62
mechanical ...............48
Instrument panel
cleaning ............... 108
lighting up panel and interior ..... 105
location of components .........87
Interval wipers ............. 111
J
Jack
operation............... 207
positioning .............. 208
Jump-starting your vehicle
attaching cables ............ 199
disconnecting cables.......... 201
K
Keyless entry system
autolock ............... 125
locking and unlocking doors ...... 124
programming entry code........ 126
Keys
key in ignition chime ..........38
positions of the ignition .........37
removing from the ignition .......38
stuck in lock position ..........38
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 323
L
Lamps
autolamp delay system ........ 104
bulb replacement specifications chart . . 285
checking ............... 281
daytime running light system ..... 102
dome lamps ............. 107
flashing the lamps .......... 110
hazard flashers ............ 113
headlamps .............. 103
high beams ............. 110
high-mount brakelamp ........ 283
illuminated entry system ....... 123
illuminated mirrors .......... 143
interior lamps ............ 105
map lamps.............. 107
replacing bulbs ............ 281
trailer ................ 195
Lane change indicator (see Turn signal) . . 110
Lights, warning and indicator
airbag............... 52,68
air suspension ............. 55
anti-lock brakes (ABS)........ 50,84
anti-theft................ 83
brake ............... 49,85
charging system .......... 52,69
check engine ............ 55,66
door ajar................ 82
engine oil pressure ........... 69
hazard warning light .......... 86
high beam ............. 54,66
low fuel ................ 54
low washer fluid ............ 81
oil pressure .............. 69
overdrive off ............ 53,81
safety belt ............. 51,65
trunk ajar ............... 82
turn signal indicator ........ 57,70
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
324 Index
Load limits
GAWR................ 188
GVWR ................ 188
trailer towing............. 190
Lubricant specifications ......... 293
Luggage compartment .......... 145
Lug nuts, tightening sequence ...... 209
M
Maintenance (see Servicing) ....... 233
Map pockets .............. 145
Master cylinder, brakes ......... 268
Memory seat
(programmable memory seat) ..... 138
Message center
door ajar ................82
english/metric button ..........75
low washer fluid ............81
reset button ..............75
select button ..............75
trunk ajar ...............82
Mirrors
automatic dimming rearview mirror . . 140
heated ................ 142
rearview ............... 140
side view mirrors (power) ....... 141
vanity mirror, illuminated ....... 143
Motorcraft parts............. 292
N
National Highway Traffic Safety
Administration ............ 223
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 325
O
Odometer
description ............. 60,73
trip odometer ............. 60
Oil filter ................ 292
Oil (see Engine oil) ........... 246
Oil viscosity .............. 246
On-board diagnostic (OBD II) system . . . 288
Overdrive ............... 177
P
Panic alarm feature, remote entry system . 130
Parking brake
operation .............. 182
warning light............ 49,85
Parts (see Motorcraft Parts) ....... 292
PCV valve, specifications ........ 292
Power distribution box (see Fuses) .... 271
Power door locks ............ 122
Power features
antenna ............... 155
door locks .............. 122
lumbar support............ 137
mirrors ............... 141
seats................. 136
windows............... 132
Power point electrical outlet ....... 144
Power steering
driving with power steering ...... 180
fluid, checking and adding ...... 270
fluid, refill capacity .......... 291
fluid, specifications .......... 293
servicing............... 180
Programmable memory seat ....... 138
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
326 Index
R
Radio (see Electronic sound systems) . . . 149
Rear air suspension system........ 184
Rearview mirror............. 140
Rear window, defroster ......... 101
Refill capacities for fluids ........ 291
Relays ................. 271
Remote control, trunk .......... 146
Remote entry system
locking/unlocking doors........ 129
opening the trunk........... 129
panic alarm.............. 130
replacement/additional transmitters. . . 131
replacing the batteries ......... 130
Restraints, safety (see Safety restraints)
adult.................. 7
child..................24
head ................. 133
infant .................24
Roadside assistance ........... 215
Roadside emergencies .......... 197
Rotating the tires ............ 260
S
Safe driving tips............. 186
Safety belts (see Safety restraints) ...... 7
Safety chains, when towing a trailer.... 194
Safety defects, reporting ......... 223
Safety restraints
adjusting the safety belts..... 10,12,15
automatic locking mode (retractor) ....11
cleaning the safety belts .........17
extension assembly ...........16
for children...............24
for infants ...............24
for pregnant women...........14
replacement ..............16
warning light and chime....... 51,65
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 327
Safety seats for children
and air bags ............ 19,26
attaching with tether straps ....... 26
automatic locking mode (retractor) .... 28
in center seating positions ........ 34
in front seat .............. 28
in rear outboard ............ 28
tether anchorage hardware ....... 26
Seats
adjusting the seat, manual ....... 134
adjusting the seats, power ....... 136
child safety seats ............ 26
cleaning upholstery .......... 139
head restraints ............ 133
programmable memory seat ...... 138
reclining the seat ........... 137
Serial number (VIN)........... 218
Service concerns ............ 216
Servicing your vehicle, precautions when
servicing............... 234
Shift-lock system ............ 174
Side mirrors
adjusting............... 141
heated ................ 142
Snow tires and chains .......... 265
Spare tire
changing the tire ........... 205
conventional spare .......... 203
finding the spare ........... 204
removing the spare tire ........ 204
temporary spare ........... 202
Spark plugs, specifications ........ 292
Specification chart, lubricants....... 293
Speed control
accelerating ............. 118
cancelling a set speed ......... 120
resetting ............... 118
resuming a set speed ......... 120
tap up/tap down........... 119
turning off .............. 120
when towing a trailer ......... 196
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
328 Index
Speedometer ............. 59,73
Starting your vehicle
preparing to start your vehicle ......39
starting a cold engine ..........40
starting after a collision .........44
starting a warm engine .........40
Steering, power ............. 180
Steering wheel
horn ................. 114
locking.................37
speed controls ............ 116
tilting ................ 115
Storage compartments, map pockets.... 145
Storing your vehicle ........... 294
Sun visor ................ 143
Supplemental air bag readiness light . . 52, 68
Supplemental Restraint System (SRS) ....17
T
Tail lamps
bulb replacement ........... 285
cleaning ............... 103
Temperature control (see Climate control) . . 88
Tether anchor installation
(see Child restraints) ..........26
Tilt steering wheel............ 115
Tires
changing ............... 202
checking the pressure ......... 260
cleaning ............... 266
replacing ............... 262
rotating ............... 260
snow tires and chains ......... 265
storing your vehicle .......... 296
tire grades .............. 263
treadwear .............. 263
wear bands.............. 262
Towing a trailer (see Trailer towing) . . . 190
Towing your vehicle, with a tow truck . . 213
Traction assist.............. 179
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
Index 329
Traction-lok rear axle .......... 178
Trailer towing
calculating maximum trailer weight . . 191
safety chains ............. 194
tips ................. 196
trailer brakes ............. 194
trailer lamps ............. 195
Transmission
automatic operation.......... 173
fluid, checking and adding
(automatic) ............ 266
fluid, refill capacities ......... 291
lubricant specifications ........ 293
Transmission control switch ....... 176
Transmitter (see Remote entry) ...... 128
Trip odometer .............. 60
Trunk
remote release lever.......... 146
trunk ajar warning light......... 82
using the keys to open ........ 145
using the remote entry system to open . 129
Tune-up specifications (VECI) ...... 288
Turn signal
indicator lights ........... 57,70
lever ................ 109
U
Used engine oil, disposal ........ 248
V
Vanity mirror.............. 143
Variable interval wipers ......... 111
VECI (Vehicle Emission
Control Information) decal....... 288
Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) . . . 218
Vehicle loading
automatic transmissions ........ 189
calculating the load .......... 189
Vehicle storage ............. 294
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
330 Index
Viscosity (see Engine oil)......... 246
Visor (see Sun visor)........... 143
W
Warm engine, starting ...........40
Warning chimes
key in ignition .............38
safety belt ............. 51,65
Warranties, radio ............ 172
Warranty Information Booklet ....... 3
Washer fluid
reservoir ............... 256
warning light ..............81
Weight limits (GAWR, GVWR) ...... 188
Wheels
cleaning ............... 266
covers ................ 210
inspection and maintenance ...... 259
Windows
one-touch down............ 133
power windows, operating....... 132
rear, defrosting ............ 101
Windshield washer fluid and wipers
checking and adding fluid ....... 256
checking and replacing wiper blades . . 258
low washer fluid light..........81
operation............... 111
reservoir ............... 256
specifications ............. 257
File:rcixv.ex
Update:Fri Feb 2 11:41:03 1996
332
Service Station
Information
[GS00500( V)05/95]
thirty-six pica chart:0011188-D
File:rcgsv.ex
Update:Wed Jan 31 10:49:28 1996

Navigation menu